Application Manual Hardware HX-CPU

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 198

HITACHI PROGRAMMABLE AUTOMATION CONTROLLER

Series
APPLICATION MANUAL (Hardware)
(SERVICE MANUAL)

NJI-637B(X)
○ Warranty period and coverage
The warranty period is the shorter period either 18 months from the date of manufacture or 12 months from the
date of installation.
However even within the warranty period, the warranty will be void if the fault is due to;
(1) Incorrect use as directed in this manual and / or in the application manual.
(2) Malfunction or failure caused by external device.
(3) Attempted repair by unauthorized personnel.
(4) Other force majeure, such as natural disasters, which beyond the responsibility of manufacturer.

The warranty is for the PAC only, any damage caused to third party equipment by malfunction of the PAC is not
covered by the warranty.

○ Repair
Any investigation or repair after the warranty period cannot be covered as free of charge. Also any faults caused by
above (1) to (4), will be charged for its repair (or for its investigation), even if the product is within the warranty
period. In case of any contact, please ask your supplier or local Hitachi distributor. (Depending on failure part,
investigation may not be possible to apply)

○ Ordering parts or asking questions


In case of repair, replacement parts ordering, or any other inquiries, please have the following details ready before
contacting the place of purchase.
(1) Model
(2) Manufacturing number (MFG.NO.)
(3) Details of the malfunction

○ Reader of this manual


This manual is described for the following person.
・Person considering to install PAC
・PAC system engineer
・Person handling PAC
・Person who maintain the installed PAC

Warning
(1) This manual may not be reproduced in its entirety or ant portion thereof without prior consent.
(2) The content of this document may be changed without notice.
(3) This document has been created with utmost care. However, if errors or questionable areas are found,
please contact us.

Windows is registered trademarks of America and other registered countries of Microsoft Corp. of the United
States.
CODESYS is registered trademarks of 3S-Smart Software Solutions GmbH.
EtherCAT is registered trademark and patented technology, licensed by Beckhoff Automation GmbH,
Germany.
Ethernet is registered trademarks of Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.
Company name or a product name is trademark or a registered trademark.
Safety Precautions
Read this manual and related documents thoroughly before installing, operating, performing preventive maintenance or
performing inspection, and be sure to use the unit correctly. Use this product after acquiring adequate knowledge of the
unit, all safety information, and all cautionary information. Also, make sure this manual enters the possession of the
chief person in charge of safety maintenance.
Safety caution items are classifies as “Danger” and “Caution” in this document.

: Cases where if handled incorrectly a dangerous circumstance may be created, resulting in


DANGER
possible death or severe injury.

: Cases where if handled incorrectly a dangerous circumstance may be created, resulting in


CAUTION
possible minor to medium injury to the body, or only mechanical damage

However, depending on the circumstances, items marked with CAUTION may result in major accidents.

In any case, they both contain important information, so please follow them closely.

Icons for prohibited items and required items are shown below:

: Indicates prohibited items (items that may not be performed). For example, when open flames are prohibited,
is shown.

: Indicates required items (items that must be performed). For example, when grounding must be performed,

is shown.

1. About installation

CAUTION
 Use this product in an environment as described in the catalog and this document.
If this product is used in an environment subject to high temperature, high humidity, excessive dust, corrosive
gases, vibration or shock, it may result in electric shock, fire or malfunction.
 Perform installation according to this manual.
If installation is not performed adequately, it may result in dropping, malfunction or an operational error in the
unit.
 Do not allow foreign objects such as wire chips to enter the unit.
They may become the cause of fire, malfunction or failure.
2. About wiring

REQUIRED
 Always perform grounding (FE terminal).
If grounding is not performed, there is a risk of electric shocks and malfunctions.

CAUTION
 Connect power supply that meets rating.
If a power supply that does not meet rating is connected, fire may be caused.
 The wiring operation should be performed by a qualified personnel.
If wiring is performed incorrectly, it may result in fire, damage, or electric shock.

3. Precautions when using the unit

DANGER
 Do not touch the terminals while the power is on.
There is a risk of electric shock.
 Structure the emergency stop circuit, interlock circuit, etc. outside the programmable automation controller
(hereinafter referred to as PAC).
Damage to the equipment or accidents may occur due to failure of the PAC.
However, do not interlock the unit to external load via relay drive power supply of the relay output module.

CAUTION
 When performing program change, forced output, RUN, STOP, etc., while the unit is running, be sure to verify
safety.
Damage to the equipment or accidents may occur due to operation error.
 Supply power according to the power–up order.
Damage to the equipment or accidents may occur due to malfunctions.

CAUTION
 Use power supply unit of EH series or HX series for supplying electric power.

CAUTION
 Do not connect DC power supply module EH-PSD / HX-PSD to a master power circuit. Supply a power to
EH-PSD / HX-PSD through an appropriate isolation transformer less than up to 150 VA by all means.
4. About preventive maintenance

DANGER
 Do not connect the +, - of the battery in reverse. Also, do not charge, disassemble, heat, place in fire, or short
circuit the battery.
There is a risk of explosion or fire.

PROHIBITED
 Do not disassemble or modify the unit.
Electric shock, malfunction or failure may result.

CAUTION
 Turn off the power supply before removing or attaching module/unit.
Electric shock, malfunction or failure may result.
Revision History
No. Description of revision Date of Manual number
revision
1 The first edition 2016.11 NJI-637(X)
2 Runtime update to V3.5 SP13 2020.01 NJI-637A(X)
3 Runtime update to V3.5 SP16 2021.04 NJI-637B(X)
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction 1-1 to 1-4
1.1 Doing after Unpacking .................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2 About Manuals .............................................................................................................................. 1-2

Chapter 2 Features 2-1 to 2-10


2.1 Features of HX Series................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Integrated Development System HX-CODESYS ......................................................................... 2-5
2.3 Communication Function .............................................................................................................. 2-9
2.4 System Configuration.................................................................................................................... 2-10

Chapter 3 General Specifications 3-1 to 3-6


3.1 General Specifications .................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.2 List of System Equipment ............................................................................................................. 3-2
3.3 List of Current Consumption ......................................................................................................... 3-5

Chapter 4 CPU Module 4-1 to 4-16


4.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Functional Specifications .............................................................................................................. 4-5
4.3 Ethernet Port Specifications ......................................................................................................... 4-8
4.4 USB Port Specifications ................................................................................................................ 4-11
4.5 SD Card Specifications ................................................................................................................. 4-12
4.6 Serial Port Specifications .............................................................................................................. 4-13
4.7 Battery Specifications .................................................................................................................. 4-15

Chapter 5 Power Supply, Base, I/O Controller 5-1 to 5-8


5.1 Power Supply Module ................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Base Unit ...................................................................................................................................... 5-5
5.3 I/O Controller ................................................................................................................................. 5-8

Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module 6-1 to 6-48


6.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Specifications ................................................................................................................................ 6-5

Chapter 7 Analog I/O Module, Resistance Temperature Detector Input Module,


Thermocouple Input Module 7-1 to 7-30
7.1 12-bit Analog I/O Module .............................................................................................................. 7-1
7.2 14-bit Analog I/O Module .............................................................................................................. 7-12
7.3 Isolated Analog I/O Module .......................................................................................................... 7-17
7.4 Resistance Temperature Detector Input Module .......................................................................... 7-22
7.5 Thermocouple Input Module ......................................................................................................... 7-27

Chapter 8 Positioning and Counter Module 8-1 to 8-8


8.1 Single-axis Positioning Module (Discontinued) ............................................................................ 8-1
8.2 High Speed Counter Module ........................................................................................................ 8-4
Chapter 9 Communication and Network Module 9-1 to 9-36
9.1 CPU Link Module .......................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2 PROFIBUS-DP Master Module 2 ................................................................................................. 9-4
9.3 PROFIBUS-DP Slave Controller 2 ................................................................................................ 9-9
9.4 EtherCAT Slave Controller ........................................................................................................... 9-13
9.5 FL-net Module 3 ............................................................................................................................ 9-18
9.6 Serial Interface Module ................................................................................................................. 9-22
9.7 DeviceNet Master Module 2 ......................................................................................................... 9-27
9.8 DeviceNet Slave Controller 2 ........................................................................................................ 9-32

Chapter 10 Accessories 10-1 to 10-6


10.1 Dummy Module ............................................................................................................................. 10-1
10.2 Expansion Cable ........................................................................................................................... 10-1
10.3 Terminal Block for 32/64 Points I/O Module ................................................................................. 10-2
10.4 Cable for 32 / 64-Point Module ..................................................................................................... 10-4
10.5 Cable for Counter Input Module .................................................................................................... 10-5

Chapter 11 PAC Installation, Mounting, Wiring 11-1 to 11-10


11.1 Installation ..................................................................................................................................... 11-1
11.2 Mounting Module .......................................................................................................................... 11-3
11.3 Wiring ............................................................................................................................................ 11-4

Chapter 12 Maintenance and Inspection 12-1 to 12-2


12.1 Daily and Periodic Inspection ....................................................................................................... 12-1
12.2 Life of Product ............................................................................................................................... 12-2

Chapter 13 Troubleshooting 13-1 to 13-6


13.1 Error Code .................................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.2 Corrective Actions when Error Occurs.......................................................................................... 13-4
13.3 Error Libraries .............................................................................................................................. 13-6
Chapter 1 Introduction
Thank you very much for choosing Hitachi Programmable Automation Controller (hereinafter referred to as PAC) HX
series.

This application manual informs hardware of HX series which is a high-performance PAC system suitable for IoT.
The contents relevant to programming has been separated as an application manual software edition.
Please read this manual and the following manuals carefully when constructing a system using HX series.
Table 1.1 List of Description materials

Items Title of material Manual number


HX series Application manual (Hardware) NJI-637*(X)
Application manual (Software) NJI-638*(X)
* The last alphabet of the manual No. stands for version starting from blank, A, B, C...

1.1 Doing after Unpacking

(1) Preparation of programming software HX-CODESYS


Please use HX-CODESYS for programming HX series CPU module (hereinafter referred to as HX-CPU). The
following table indicates the available version combination of HX-CPU firmware and HX-CODESYS and do not use
with the programming software EHV-CODESYS because it does not support HX-CPU.
HX-CPU Software version HX-CODESYS version
V3.5.8.2x HX-CODESYS Ver.3.5 SP8 Patch4 or newer
V3.5.13.4x HX-CODESYS Ver.3.5 SP13 Patch2 or newer
V3.5.16.2x HX-CODESYS Ver.3.5 SP16 Patch2 or newer

(2) Initializing of user program


Since a memory in the HX-CPU is not set at first, error code to mean memory error may be displayed on the
7-segment LED. Please initialize the memory in the HX-CPU first by using HX-CODESYS.

(3) Battery error indication


HX-CPU is shipped without a lithium battery. The battery is sold separately from CPU.
Therefore when Battery error detection*1 (OK LED blinking in the battery error) of HX-CODESYS is set Enable,
HX-CPU detects a battery error, and "71" is displayed in 7-segment LED. When you want to invalidate battery error
detection, please set this parameter in Disable (invalidity).

*1 The tab of Configuration in Device of the project tree has the setting of Battery error detection.
Battery error detection is set in Enable in initial setup.

1– 1
Chapter 1 Introduction

1.2 About Manuals

Various modules for EH-150 / EHV series shown in Table 1.2 are able to be used with HX-CPU. There is some
module that HX-CPU does not support yet. Un-supported modules are going to be supported.
Please refer to manuals shown in Table 1.2 for the detail specification of various modules. Please refer to chapter 5 or
after of this manual for modules which manual number are blank in Table 1.2.

Table 1.2 Related manuals to HX-CPU (1/2)


Product Model Manual number*1
Specifications
name name Japanese English
Power supply EH-PSA Input 100 to 240 V AC Output - -
module HX-PSA Input 100 to 240 V AC Output - NJI-645(X)
EH-PSD Input 21.6 to 26.4 V DC Output - -
HX-PSD Input 21.6 to 26.4 V DC Output - NJI-645(X)
EH-PSR Input 100 to 240 V AC Output for redundancy NJI-554 NJI-554(X)
I/O controller EH-IOCH2 I/O controller for expansion unit NJI-440 NJI-440(X)
Digital input EH-XD8 8 points, 24 V DC input - -
module EH-XD16 16 points, 24 V DC input - -
EH-XDL16 16 points, 24 V DC input, Intensified filter - -
EH-XDS16 16 points, 24 V DC Fast input NJI-607 NJI-607(X)
EH-XDA16 16 points, 48 V DC input NJI-615 NJI-615(X)
EH-XD32 32 points, 24 V DC input - -
EH-XDL32 32 points, 24 V DC input, Intensified filter - -
EH-XDS32 32 points, 24 V DC Fast input NJI-382 NJI-382(X)
EH-XD32E 32 points, 24 V DC input, Spring type terminal block NJI-438 NJI-438(X)
EH-XDL32E 32 points, 24 V DC input, Spring type terminal block, Intensified filter NJI-438 NJI-438(X)
EH-XD32H 32 points, 24 V DC input, Compatible connecter with EM and H-200 NJI-534 NJI-534(X)
EH-XDB32 32 points, 12 V DC input NJI-382 NJI-382(X)
EH-XDBL32 32 points, 12 V DC input NJI-382 NJI-382(X)
EH-XTT32 32 points, 3 to 15 V DC input NJI-678 NJI-678(X)
EH-XD64 64 points, 24 V DC input - -
EH-XDL64 64 points, 24 V DC input NJI-372 NJI-372(X)
EH-XDB64 64 points, 12 V DC input NJI-372 NJI-372(X)
EH-XDBL64 64 points, 12 V DC input NJI-372 NJI-372(X)
EH-XA16 16 points, 100 to 120 V AC input - -
EH-XAH16 16 points, 200 to 240 V AC input - -
Digital output EH-YR8B 8 points, relay output (isolated contact point), 100 / 240VAC, 24V DC NJI-427 NJI-427(X)
module EH-YR12 12 points, relay output, 100 / 240 V AC, 24 V DC - -
EH-YR16 16 points, relay output, 100 / 240 V AC, 24 V DC, 16 points / 1 common NJI-416 NJI-416(X)
EH-YR16D 16 points, relay output, 100 / 240 V AC, 24 V DC, 8 points / 1 common NJI-416 NJI-416(X)
EH-YT8 8 points, transistor output, 12 / 24 V DC (sink type) - -
EH-YTP8 8 points, transistor output, 12 / 24 V DC (source type) - -
EH-YT16 16 points, transistor output, 12 / 24 V DC (sink type) - -
EH-YTP16 16 points, transistor output, 12 / 24 V DC (source type) - -
EH-YTA16 16 points, transistor output, 24 / 48 V DC (sink type) NJI-634 NJI-634(X)
EH-YTPA16 16 points, transistor output, 24 / 48 V DC (source type) NJI-634 NJI-634(X)
EH-YTP16S 16 points, transistor output, 12 / 24 V DC (source type),
- -
short-circuit protection
EH-YT32 32 points, transistor output, 12 / 24 V DC (sink type) - -
EH-YTP32 32 points, transistor output, 12 / 24 V DC (source type) - -
EH-YT32E 32 points, transistor output, 12 / 24 V DC (sink type)
NJI-439 NJI-439(X)
Spring terminal block
EH-YTP32E 32 points, transistor output, 12 / 24 V DC (source type)
NJI-439 NJI-439(X)
Spring terminal block
EH-YT32H 32 points, transistor output, 5 / 12 / 24 V DC (sink type)
NJI-535 NJI-535(X)
Compatible connecter with EM and H-200
EH-YTT32 32 points, TTL output, 4 to 15 V DC (sink type) NJI-679 NJI-679(X)

1– 2
Chapter 1 Introduction

Table 1.2 Related manuals to HX-CPU (2/2)


Product Manual number*1
Model name Specifications
name Japanese English
Digital output EH-YT64 64 points, transistor output, 12 / 24 V DC (sink type) - -
module EH-YTP64 64 points, transistor output, 12 / 24 V DC (source type) - -
EH-YS16 16 points, triac output, 100 / 240 V AC NJI-437 NJI-437(X)
TTL input EH-MTT32 Input 16 points, Output 16 points, 4 to 27 V DC
NJI-597 NJI-597(X)
output module Compatible connector with PHM-TT
EH-MTT32A 16 points, input, 3 to 15 V DC (sink type)
NJI-680 NJI-680(X)
16 points, output, 4 to 15 V DC (sink type)
Analog input EH-AX44 12 bits analog input (4 to 20 mA, 0 to 10 V) each 4 ch. - -
module EH-AX8V 12 bits analog input 8 ch., Voltage (0 to +10 V) - -
EH-AX8H 12 bits analog input 8 ch., Voltage (-10 to +10 V) - -
EH-AX8I 12 bits analog input 8 ch., Current (4 to 20 mA) - -
EH-AX8IO 12 bits analog input 8 ch., Current (0 to 22 mA) - -
EH-AXH8M 14 bits analog input 8 ch.
NJI-446 NJI-446(X)
(0 to 22 mA, 4 to 22 mA, -10 to +10 V, 0 to 10 V)
EH-AXG5M Isolation between channels, 16 bits analog input 5ch.
NJI-586 NJI-586(X)
(0 to 22 mA, 4 to 22 mA, -10 to +10 V, 0 to 10 V)
Analog output EH-AY22 12 bits analog output (4 to 20 mA, 0 to 10 V) each 2 ch. - -
module EH-AY2H 12 bits analog output 2 ch., Voltage (-10 to +10 V) - -
EH-AY4V 12 bits analog output 4 ch., Voltage (0 to +10 V) - -
EH-AY4H 12 bits analog output 4 ch., Voltage (-10 to +10 V) - -
EH-AY4I 12 bits analog output 4 ch., Current (4 to 20 mA) - -
EH-AYH8M 14 bits analog output 8 ch., (0 to 22 mA, 4 to 22 mA, 0 to 10 V) NJI-447 NJI-447(X)
EH-AYG4M Isolation between channels, 16 bits analog output 4 ch.
NJI-587 NJI-587(X)
(0 to 22 mA, 4 to 22 mA, -10 to +10 V, 0 to 10 V)
RTD input EH-PT4 4 channels resistance temperature detector, Signed 15 bits
NJI-323 NJI-324(X)
module Platinum (Pt 100 Ω / Pt 1000 Ω)
EH-RTD8 6/8 channels resistance temperature detector, Signed 15 bits
NJI-613 NJI-613(X)
Platinum (Pt 100 Ω / Pt 1000 Ω)
Thermocouple EH-TC8 Signed 15 bits, Thermocouple input (K, E, J, T, B, R, S, N)
NJI-445 NJI-445(X)
input module 8 channels
Positioning and EH-CU 2 channels high-speed counter input, Maximum frequency of
NJI-321 NJI-321(X)
counter module 100 kHz, 1/2-phases switchover, 4-point opened collector output
EH-CUE 1 channel high-speed counter input, Maximum frequency of
NJI-340 NJI-340(X)
100 kHz, 1/2-phases switchover, 2-point opened collector output
EH-POS *2 1-axis pulse positioning module NJI-314 NJI-315(X)
Communication EH-SIO Serial communication interface module NJI-443 NJI-443(X)
module EH-RMP2 PROFIBUS-DP master module,
NJI-621 NJI-621(X)
512 / 512 words I/O, 8 units per CPU can be installed
EH-IOCP2 PROFIBUS-DP slave controller,
NJI-612 NJI-612(X)
122 / 122 words I/O
EH-RMD2 DeviceNet master module,
NJI-655 -
256 / 256 words I/O, 8 units per CPU can be installed
EH-IOCD2 DeviceNet slave controller, 176 words I/O NJI-655 -
EH-IOCA EtherCAT slave controller, 176 words I/O NJI-599 NJI-599(X)
EH-FLN3 FL-net interface module NJI-410 -
EH-LNK CPU link module (coaxial), 8 units per CPU can be mounted NJI-381 NJI-381(X)
EH-OLNK CPU link module (optical fiber), 8 units per CPU can be mounted NJI-395 NJI-395(X)
EH-OLNKG CPU link module (support optical fiber GI50 / 125 µm cable),
NJI-395 NJI-395(X)
8 units per CPU can be mounted
EH-OLNKE CPU link module (support optical fiber GI62.5 / 125 µm cable),
NJI-395 NJI-395(X)
8 units per CPU can be mounted
*1 The last alphabet of the manual No. stands for version starting from blank, A, B, C...
*2 Discontinued product

1– 3
Chapter 1 Introduction

MEMO

1– 4
Chapter 2 Features
2.1 Features of HX Series

Open standards, High-performance, TCO reduction*1


(1) Open standards
The Hitachi HX Series supports global manufacturing by standardized programming with
5 programming languages compatible with the IEC61131-3 international standard. The integrated EtherCAT master
function (industrial open network) enables interconnection of a wide range of devices. Seamless data transfer from
field level to cloud is achieved via OPC-Unified Architecture.

(2) High-performance
Through the effective combination of up-to-date developed high-performance CPU with CODESYS software, Hitachi
provides sequential control (logic) and motion control*3 on one CPU platform with very fast execution speed.

(3) TCO reduction*1


HX Series are designed to provide the functionality of PAC Controller (Programmable Automation Controller) which
has both features of PLC and IPC.
HX series contribute to TCO (Total cost of ownership) reduction by drive down cost of installation, development and
maintenance.

3 Ethernet port as standard


Enterprise ERP ERP
Management (Full function / CNC motion / Hybrid model)
MES WMS Cloud
Various communication modes between master,
Operation
Data

controller and slave units by one CPU.


Order

Network
Seamless connectivity

Supervision Communication
Control I oT PAC system
HF-W/IoT *2 HX serirs

Soft motion *3 Logic control


IPC based Controller
Supporting various field networks

Field
PLC PLC
Sensors
Machines Devices

ERP : Enterprise Resource Planning, MES : Manufacturing Execution System


WMS : Warehouse Management System, IPC : Industrial PC
PLC : Programmable Logic Controller
*1 Total Cost of Ownership
*2 HF-W / IoT is a product of Hitachi Industry and Control Solutions, Ltd.
*3 PLCopen based soft-motion control function blocks are available on Motion model and CNC motion model.

2–1
Chapter 2 Features

All modules of EH-150 series can be used.*1


HX-CPU can assemble all modules of EH-150 series including input and output module and communication module.
When using a basic base units and 5 expansion bases, HX-CPU can controls 66 modules and 4,224 I/O points at the
maximum.
*1 Some high-function modules will be supported in near future.

041526317 04152637
1 81911111
18 19 1 1

EtherCAT master
In all models of HX-CPU, EtherCAT master function is available in Ethernet ports of the CPU.
Different type of slave devices such as inverters and remote I/O are controlled via EtherCAT.

EtherCAT
Slaves

Servo Inverter Compact I/O Slice I/O

Large size data logging (SD Card)


The Full Function Model has a SD card interface, which makes data logging easy. (Function blocks to access files are
available in CODESYS library.)

2–2
Chapter 2 Features

OPC UA Server
The OPC UA (Unified Architecture) is a software interface between different manufacturers’ apparatuses and host
system based on the concept to unify industrial field and IT field.
HX-CPU has OPC-UA server function as standard. OPC-UA server allows easy connectivity with ERP, MES, SCADA,
SAP, and various management and analysis software in host system.

Programmable HMI connectivity


Programmable Touch-panel GP4000 series and EH-TP500 series are connectable with HX-CPU.

 GP4000 series
All models are available with CODESYS V3 Ethernet Driver

Selectable from 4 models with 12.1”, 10.4”, 7.5”, 5.7” display size

 EH-TP500 series
All models are available with CODESYS V3 Ethernet Driver
Selectable from 4 models with 13.3”, 10.4”, 7.0”, 4.3” display size

Easy maintenance
 Fan-less design
The CPU has no mechanical parts which need to be replaced.
 Battery-less design
Non-volatile memory is used for programming memory and data memory. The CPU can retain manufacturing data
without optional batteries to protect the data from sudden power failures.

Data and Program Protection


 Block unauthorized access  Control user access
- Detect / Protect unauthorized external access - Login authentification
- Block unauthorized remote login connection - User and group control
- Prevent malicious data hacking - Setting access authority

Online user registration Access permission User management

2–3
Chapter 2 Features

Web visualization (Monitoring via Web Browser)


Easy remote access to the controller´s web server to monitor the application status without preparing a customized
HMI. Potential cost reduction for hardware and on site resources through off site monitoring.
 Web server function prepared as standard (in Full Function Model)
 No requirement of customized HMI
 Availability of monitoring via standard web browser
 Remote maintenance, diagnosis and control can be also achieved

Ethernet

2–4
Chapter 2 Features

2.2 Integrated Development System HX-CODESYS

CODESYS is the widest-spread IEC61131-3 development system in the world. Over 350 controller manufacturers
rely on CODESYS, in addition to tens of thousands of end users from a wide variety of industries.

HX-CODESYS -integrating various support functions in every phase of development

 Project tree allow you collective management of device, task and program of application.
 Integrated configurator for EtherCAT and Modbus can connect I/O channels on slaves to IEC variables.
 HX-CODESYS is including editors for all 5 IEC 61131-3 compliant implementation languages.
 The tool display language supports Japanese, English German, French, Italian, Spanish, Russian,
Chinese, eight languages in total.
 Optional object-oriented programming according to IEC 61131-3 (3rd Edition).
 Compiler for optimized powerful machine code of HX-CPU.
 Various function such as automatic input completion and assistance, syntax error check, debug and
simulation allow you efficient development.

2–5
Chapter 2 Features

IEC61131-3 compliant 5 languages available to skill and application

LD (Ladder Diagram) FBD (Function Block Diagram)


LD is a graphical language based on relay circuit. LD is FBD is a graphic language which the flow of data
suitable for the bit operation such as interlock processes. and the signal is easy to watch.

ST (Structured Text) IL (Instruction List)


ST is a text language based on PASCAL. It is suitable for IL is a text language suitable for traditional PLC. It
branch, repetition and the arithmetic operation that were is suitable for high speed operation and convenient
weak points in LD. for read out and collate program.

SFC (Sequential Function Chart) CFC (Continuous Function Chart)


SFC is a graphic language which can express state CFC is a graphical language with unrestricted layout
transition. It is suitable for process control to step. Each of POUs and connections, including feedback paths.
step is able to be described with LD, FBD and IL. (CFC is not IEC61131-3 compliant language.)

2–6
Chapter 2 Features

Reduction of development time and cost of IEC 61131-3 compliant applications

 Local variable and Global variable


You can define Local variables that are effective only in each program and Global variables that are effective in
all program. You can make application program having high reusability by using a local variable and global
variable properly.
 Structured programming
You can make programs and function blocks with multi-layer structure. This structured programming improves
readability of program, maintenance characteristics and reliability. As a result, application development efficiency
increases.
 Library
Frequently used program or function can be registered as library, which can be called from other projects. Library
contents can able to be non-indicated for the distribution use to end users.

System design Programming Debug Trial run

Reduction

Substantial library
Various libraries such as PID or various conversion are incorporated as a standard library other than IEC61131-3
standard command.
 PID
 Analog output with Slew Rate
 ASCII conversion
 BCD conversion
 Gray code conversion
 String operation
 Analog hysteresis
 Minimum, Maximum, Mean,
Variance

2–7
Chapter 2 Features

Convenient functions
HX-CODESYS improves programming efficiency, debug efficiency in various convenient functions.
 Automatic input completion and assistance avoiding compile error because of input error.
 Color-coded syntax highlighting, for example keywords and connected brackets.
 In LD editor and FBD editor, you can use ST language in function block.
 You can change any circuit or command to comment with right-click.

Powerful debugging functions


Powerful debugging functions features save commissioning cost.
 Online-monitor
 Offline-simulation
 Breakpoint
 Force value
 Single step execution
 Single cycle execution
 Flow control
 Program change during run
 Trace
 Visualization
 Web visualization

About HX-CODESYS
HX-CODESYS is IEC61131-3 compliant integrated development system for only HX series.
CODESYS® is a registered trademark of 3S-Smart Software Solutions GmbH. HX-CODESYS is the same tool with
CODESYS, but is preinstalled device description files and libraries for HX series.

2–8
Chapter 2 Features

2.3 Communication Function

HX-CPU of Full function / CNC motion / Hybrid model have 3 Ethernet ports. Standard and motion model have 2
Ethernet ports. HX-CPU can communicate with host system, controller, and field devices individually. In addition, by
a combination of how to use, HX-CPU can realize various communications.

Communication toward 3 direction


Cloud
Host system
Ethernet

OPC-UA

Ethernet

Figure 2.1 Ethernet Communication port

You can build a flexible system with HX-CPU and Hitachi EtherCAT slave products such as coupler type slave
(EH-IOCA) and Inverter and Servo. EH-IOCA is a coupler type slave and can be connected with 22 modules per slave
node. Therefore, EH-IOCA can control 1,408 points in digital I/O. (176 channels in analog I/O) The configuration
example is shown in Figure 2.2.

[Configuration Example]

Slave controller EtherCAT master (HX-CPU)


EH-IOCA

ADV series LAN cable (More over CAT5, maximum 100m between slaves)
Servo amplifier and Motor
ADV series HTW motor series EH-IOCA EH-IOCA

Slave Redundant power supply Slave


Configuration with redundant
WJ200 series power supply is possible.
Inverter
WJ200 series

You can increase I/O points with


adding Expansion base unit.
I/O controller EH-IOCH2

Figure 2.2 EtherCAT configuration

2–9
Chapter 2 Features

2.4 System Configuration

HX series is a module type programmable automation controller. The basic configuration is shown in Figure 2.3.

1] Power supply module 2] CPU module 3] I/O module


4] Basic base

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

7] Input and output controller No.1 5] Expansion base

1] Power supply module


6] Expansion cable

7] Input and output controller No.2 5] Expansion base

1] Power supply module


6] Expansion cable

7] Input and output controller No.3 5] Expansion base

1] Power supply module


6] Expansion cable

7] Input and output controllerNo.4 5] Exoansion base

1] Power supply module


6] Expansion cable

7] Input and output controller No.5 5] Expansion base

1] Power supply module

Figure 2.3 System configuration diagram (HX series)

Table 2.1 Modules in HX system configuration


No. Device name Description of function
1] Power supply module Converts power supply to the power to be used within the HX-series.
Performs operations based on the content of the user program, receives input and controls
2] CPU module
output.
Input module, output module, analog module, high-functional module, and communicate
3] I/O module
module.
4] Basic base Base in which the power module, CPU module, I/O module, etc. are loaded.
5] Expansion base Base in which the power module, input and output controller, I/O module, etc. are loaded.
Cable to connect the input and output controller for the expansion base with the basic base.
6] Expansion cable
Use 2m betweens stations at the maximum and within 8m at total.
Input and output
7] Interface between the expansion base and the CPU module.
controller
* The basic base 4] and the expansion base 5] are the same product.

2 – 10
Chapter 3 General Specifications
3.1 General Specifications
The general specification is environmental information about setting and use of this product.

Table 3.1 General specifications of HX series


Item Specification
Operational temperature 0 to 55 °C (* 0 to 45 °C)
Storage temperature -10 to 75 °C
Operational humidity 5 to 95 % RH (no condensation)
Storage humidity 5 to 95 % RH (no condensation)
Vibration resistance Conforms to IEC 60068-2-6
Shock resistance Conforms to IEC 60068-2-27
Usage environment No corrosive gases, no excessive dust
Structure Open wall-mount type
Cooling Natural air cooling
* If HX-CP1S08, HX-CP1H16, HX-CP1S08M, HX-CP1H16M, HXC-CP1H16 or EH-YR16 is used as UL listed product,
max. surrounding temperature rating is 45 °C.

3– 1
Chapter 3 General Specifications

3.2 List of System Equipment


(1) Modules
Table 3.2 List of system equipment (1/2)
Standard
Product Model name Specification Remarks
compliant
Power module EH-PSA Input 100 to 240 V AC, Output 5 V DC 3.8 A, 24 V DC 0.4 A CE, UL, RCM *1
HX-PSA Input 100 to 240 V AC, Output 5 V DC 3.8 A, 24 V DC 0.4 A CE, UL, RCM *1
EH-PSD Input 24 V DC, Output 5 V DC 3.8 A CE, UL, RCM *1
HX-PSD Input 24 V DC, Output 5 V DC 3.8 A CE, UL, RCM *1
EH-PSR Input 100 to 240 V AC, Output 5 V DC 5.6 A *5 CE *1
I/O controller EH-IOCH2 I/O control module (1 unit / expansion base unit) CE, UL, RCM *1
Base unit EH-BS3A 3 I/O modules installed CE, UL, RCM Commonly used
EH-BS5A 5 I/O modules installed CE, UL, RCM for basic or
EH-BS6A 6 I/O modules installed CE, UL, RCM expansion base
EH-BS8A 8 I/O modules installed CE, UL, RCM
EH-BS11A 11 I/O modules installed CE, UL, RCM
EH-BS8R Redundant power supply, 8 I/O modules installed -
Digital input EH-XD8 8 pts., 24 V DC input (response time 5 ms) CE, UL, RCM *3
module EH-XD16 16 pts., 24 V DC input (response time 5 ms) CE, UL, RCM *3
EH-XDL16 16 pts., 24 V DC input (response time 16 ms) CE, RCM *3
EH-XDS16 16 pts., 24 V DC input (response time 1 ms) CE, RCM *3
EH-XDA16 16 pts., 48 V DC input (response time 5 ms) CE
EH-XD32 32 pts., 24 V DC input (response time 5 ms) CE, UL, RCM
EH-XDL32 32 pts., 24 V DC input (response time 16 ms) CE
EH-XDS32 32 pts., 24 V DC input (response time 1 ms) CE, RCM
EH-XD32E 32 pts., 24 V DC input (response time 1 ms), Spring type terminal CE, UL, RCM
EH-XDL32E 32 pts., 24 V DC input (response time 16 ms), Spring type terminal CE, UL, RCM
EH-XD32H 32 pts., 24 V DC input (response time 4 ms), compatible CE, RCM
connector with PIM / H-DM (EM / H-200)
EH-XDB32 32 pts., 12 V DC input (response time 5 ms) CE
EH-XDBL32 32 pts., 12 V DC input (response time 16 ms) CE
EH-XTT32 32 pts., 3 to 15 V DC input (response time 1 ms) -
EH-XD64 64 pts., 24 V DC input (response time 1 ms) CE, UL, RCM
EH-XDL64 64 pts., 24 V DC input (response time 16 ms) CE
EH-XDB64 64 pts., 12 V DC input (response time 1 ms) CE
EH-XDBL64 64 pts., 12 V DC input (response time 16 ms) CE
EH-XA16 16 pts., 100 to 120 V AC input (response time 15 ms) CE, UL, RCM *3
EH-XAH16 16 pts., 200 to 240 V AC input (response time 15 ms) CE, UL, RCM *3
Digital output EH-YR8B 8 pts., Independent relay output, 100 / 240 V AC, 24 V DC CE, RCM *3, *4
module EH-YR12 12 pts., Relay, 100 / 240 V AC, 24 V DC CE, UL, RCM *3, *4
EH-YR16 16 pts., Relay, 100 / 240 V AC, 24 V DC CE, UL, RCM *3, *4
EH-YR16D 16 pts., Relay, 100 / 240 V AC, 24 V DC, 2-common CE, RCM *3
EH-YT8 8 pts., Transistor, 12 / 24 V DC (sink type) CE, UL, RCM *3, *4
EH-YTP8 8 pts., Transistor, 12 / 24 V DC (source type) CE, UL, RCM *3, *4
EH-YT16 16 pts., Transistor, 12 / 24 V DC (sink type) CE, UL, RCM *3, *4
EH-YTP16 16 pts., Transistor, 12 / 24 V DC (source type) CE, UL, RCM *3, *4
EH-YTA16 16 pts., Transistor, 24 / 48 V DC (sink type) CE
EH-YTPA16 16 pts., Transistor, 24 / 48 V DC (source type) CE
EH-YTP16S 16 pts., Transistor, 12 / 24 V DC (source type) *3 CE, UL, RCM Electric short
EH-YT32 32 pts., Transistor, 12 / 24 V DC (sink type) *2 CE, UL, RCM circuit protection
EH-YTP32 32 pts., Transistor, 12 / 24 V DC (source type) *2 CE, UL, RCM
EH-YT32E 32 pts., Transistor, 12 / 24 V DC (sink type), Spring type terminal CE, UL, RCM
EH-YTP32E 32 pts., Transistor, 12 / 24 V DC (source type), Spring type terminal CE, UL, RCM
EH-YT32H 32 pts., Transistor, 5 / 12 / 24 V DC (sink type), CE, RCM
compatible connector with POM / H-DM (EM / H-200)
EH-YTT32 32 pts., TTL, 4 to 15 V DC (sink type) -
EH-YT64 64 pts., Transistor, 12 / 24 V DC (sink type) CE, UL, RCM Electric short
EH-YTP64 64 pts., Transistor, 12 / 24 V DC (source type) CE, UL, RCM circuit protection
EH-YS16 16 pts., Triac, 100 / 240 V AC CE, RCM *3, *4

3– 2
Chapter 3 General Specifications

Table 3.2 List of system equipment (2/2)


Standard
Product Model name Specification Remarks
compliant
TTL input EH-MTT32 Input 16 pts., Output 16 pts., 4 to 27 V DC CE
output Compatible connector with PHM-TT
module
EH-MTT32A 16 pts., 3 to 15 V DC input (sink type) -
16 pts., 4 to 15 V DC output (sink type)
Analog EH-AX44 12 bits, 8 ch. (4 ch. of 4 to 20 mA, 4 ch. of 0 to 10 V) CE, UL, RCM *3
input EH-AX8V 12 bits, 8 ch., Voltage (0 to 10 V) CE, UL, RCM *3
module
EH-AX8H 12 bits, 8 ch., Voltage (-10 to +10 V) CE, UL, RCM *3
EH-AX8I 12 bits, 8 ch., Current (4 to 20 mA) CE, UL, RCM *3
EH-AX8IO 12 bits, 8 ch., Current (0 to 22 mA) CE, UL, RCM *3
EH-AXH8M 14 bits, 8 ch. (0 to 22 mA, 4 to 22 mA, -10 to +10 V, 0 to 10 V) CE, UL, RCM *3
EH-AXG5M 12 / 16 bits, 5 ch. (0 to 22 mA, 4 to 22 mA, -10 to +10 V, 0 to 10 V), CE, RCM *3
Galvanic isolation between channels
EH-PT4 Signed 15 bits, 4 ch. Resistance Temperature Detector input, PT100 / PT1000 CE, UL, RCM *3
EH-RTD8 Signed 15 bits, 6 ch. (3-wire) / 8 ch. (2-wire) Resistance Temperature CE, RCM *3
Detector input, PT100 / PT1000
EH-TC8 Signed 15 bits, 8 ch. Thermocouple input (K,E,J,T,B,R,S,N) CE, UL, RCM *3
Analog EH-AY22 12 bits, 4 ch. (2 ch. of 4 to 20 mA, 2 ch. of 0 to 10 V) CE, UL, RCM *3
output EH-AY2H 12 bits, 2 ch., Voltage (-10 to +10 V) CE, UL, RCM *3
module CE, UL, RCM
EH-AY4V 12 bits, 4 ch., Voltage (0 to 10 V) *3
EH-AY4H 12 bits, 4 ch., Voltage (-10 to +10 V) CE, UL, RCM *3
EH-AY4I 12 bits, 4 ch., Current (4 to 20 mA) CE, UL, RCM *3
EH-AYH8M 14 bits, 8 ch. (0 to 22 mA, 4 to 22 mA, 0 to 10 V) CE, UL, RCM *3
EH-AYG4M 12 / 16 bits, 4 ch. (0 to 22 mA, 4 to 22 mA, 0 to 10 V, -10 to +10 V), CE, RCM *3
Galvanic isolation between channels
Positioning EH-CU 2 channels high-speed counter input, Maximum frequency of CE, UL, RCM
and counter 100 kHz, 1/2-phases switchover, 4-point opened collector output
module EH-CUE 1 channel high-speed counter input, Maximum frequency of 100 kHz, CE, UL, RCM
1/2-phases switchover, 2-point opened collector output
EH-POS 1-axis pulse positioning module UL, RCM Discontinued
Communicat EH-SIO Serial interface module, RS-232C, RS-422 / RS-485 CE, UL, RCM
ion and EH-RMP2 PROFIBUS-DP master module, 512 / 512 words I/O CE, RCM 8 units per CPU
network
EH-IOCP2 PROFIBUS-DP slave controller, 1,408 points(176 words) I/O CE, RCM *1
module
EH-RMD2 DeviceNet master module, 256 / 256 words I/O CE
EH-IOCD2 DeviceNet slave controller, 1,408 points(176 words) I/O CE *1
EH-IOCA EterCAT slave controller, 1408 points (176 words) I/O CE, RCM *1
EH-LNK CPU link module (coaxial) RCM 8 units per CPU
EH-OLNK CPU link module (optical fiber) UL, RCM 8 units per CPU
EH-OLNKG CPU link module (support optical fiber GI50 / 125 µm cable) UL, RCM 8 units per CPU
EH-OLNKE CPU link module (support optical fiber GI62.5 / 125 µm cable) UL, RCM 8 units per CPU
EH-FLN3 FL-net interface module CE, UL, RCM 2 units per CPU
Dummy module EH-DUM Module for an opened slot CE, UL, RCM
*1 CPUs, power modules and I/O controllers (EH-IOCH2, EH-IOCP2, EH-IOCA) are mounted on reserved positions only.
*2 Short circuit protection version is from May 2001 production. (MFG. No. 01Exx)
*3 The suggested torque for the terminal connections is 9 in-lbs as below.
Cable for wiring Torque to tighten
Wire Size Material Type the terminal
22 - 14 AWG Cu Sol / Str. 9 in.-lbs (1.02 Nm)
*4 Supporting module version is from April 2005 production. (MFG. No. 05Dxx)
*5 Please use the maximum output current of EH-PSR on the following conditions.
Less than 45 degree ambient temperature: 5.6 A
From 45 to 55 degree ambient temperature: 5.0 A
[Installation rule]
- EH-(O)LNK, EH-RMP2, EH-RMD2 can be mounted up to 8 units per CPU. Available position is from slot 0 to 7 of basic base only.

- EH-FLN3 can be mounted up to 2 units per CPU. Available position is from 0 to 7 of basic base only.

! Caution
The system of HX-CPU supports a maximum of 11 modules per base units. However, the number of modules which can be
provided depends on the maximum output current of the power module. Make sure to use HX-CPU in a permissible level of
the maximum output current of the power module. Please refer to section 3.3 for list of current consumption.
3– 3
Chapter 3 General Specifications

(2) Peripheral devices


Table 3.3 Peripheral device of HX series
Product Model name Specification Remarks
HX-CODESYS HX-CDS IEC 61131-3 compliant programming software with ST (Structured Text), SFC -
(Sequential Function Chart), FBD (Function Block Diagram ),
LD (Ladder Logic Diagram) and IL (Instruction List).
Multilingual support (Japanese, English, German, Spanish, French, Italy, Russian,
Chinese)
* Please refer to "Software manual of HX series" for the PC operating environment necessary to use it.

(3) Connection cable


Table 3.4 Connection cables of HX series
Product Model name Specification
Cable for connecting EH-CB05A 0.5 m (1.64 ft.) length (basic to expansion and expansion to expansion)
basic base I/O
controller *1 EH-CB10A 1 m (3.28 ft.) length (basic to expansion and expansion to expansion)
EH-CB20A 2 m (6.56 ft.) length (basic to expansion and expansion to expansion)
Cable for 32 / EH-CBM01W 1 m (3.28 ft.) length (32 / 64-points I/O module to terminal block adaptor)
64-points I/O module
EH-CBM03W 3 m (9.84 ft.) length (32 / 64-points I/O module to terminal block adaptor)
(Both edges connector
type) EH-CBM05W 5 m (16.4 ft.) length (32 / 64-points I/O module to terminal block adaptor)
EH-CBM10W 10 m (32.8 ft.) length (32 / 64-points I/O module to terminal block adaptor)
Cable for 32 / EH-CBM01 1 m (3.28 ft.) length (32 / 64-points I/O module to external equipments)
64-points I/O module
EH-CBM03 3 m (9.84 ft.) length (32 / 64-points I/O module to external equipments)
(One edges connector
type) EH-CBM05 5 m (16.4 ft.) length (32 / 64-points I/O module to external equipments)
EH-CBM10 10 m (32.8 ft.) length (32 / 64-points I/O module to external equipments)
Cable for counter EH-CUC01 1 m (3.28 ft.) length (Counter input module to external equipments)
input module
EH-CUC02 2 m (6.56 ft.) length (Counter input module to external equipments)
EH-CUC03 3 m (9.84 ft.) length (Counter input module to external equipments)
EH-CUC04 4 m (13.1 ft.) length (Counter input module to external equipments)
EH-CUC05 5 m (16.4 ft.) length (Counter input module to external equipments)
*1 Use in a maximum of 2 m (6.56ft.) between stations, 8 m (26.24ft.) in total

(4) Optional product


Table 3.5 Optional product of HX series
Product Type Use The life of battery (Total power failure time) Remarks
Lithium battery HX-BAT The battery is to work Min. @55 °C 25,000 [ Hr ]
real-time clock only. Max. @25 °C 67,000 [ Hr ]

During the 8 days or more of a power cut, if the retention of realtime clock data is required, please use the Lithium battery. But even

in the case of using real time clock, Battery is unnecessary when HX-CPU are always synchronized with NTP server. HX-CPU stores

user program and data (retain and persistent) to a nonvolatile memory, so the battery is unnecessary for them. The durable life of the

battery is 5 years. Even if the battery t is not a life, replace it every 5 years.

3– 4
Chapter 3 General Specifications

3.3 List of Current Consumption

Table 3.6 List of current consumption of modules


Product Model name Current consumption Product Model name Current consumption
[mA] [mA]
CPU module HX-CP1S08 1,000 Digital output EH-YT32 90
HX-CP1H16 1,200 module EH-YTP32 90
HX-CP1S08M 1,000 EH-YT32E 90
HX-CP1H16M 1,200 EH-YTP32E 90
HXC-CP1H16 1,200 EH-YT32H 90
I/O controller EH-IOCH2 80 EH-YTT32 100
Base unit EH-BS3A 200 EH-YT64 120
EH-BS5A 200 EH-YTP64 120
EH-BS6A 200 EH-YS16 250
EH-BS8A 200 TTL input output EH-MTT32 140
EH-BS11A 200 module EH-MTT32A 90
EH-BS8R 200 Analog input EH-AX44 100
Digital input EH-XD8 30 module EH-AX8V 100
module EH-XD16 50 EH-AX8H 100
EH-XDL16 50 EH-AX8I 100
EH-XDA16 50 EH-AX8IO 100
EH-XDS16 50 EH-AXH8M 70
EH-XD32 60 EH-AXG5M 300
EH-XDL32 60 EH-PT4 160
EH-XD32E 60 EH-RTD8 300
EH-XDL32E 60 EH-TC8 70
EH-XD32H 60 Analog output EH-AY22 100
EH-XDB32 60 module EH-AY2H 100
EH-XDBL32 60 EH-AY4V 100
EH-XTT32 80 EH-AY4H 100
EH-XD64 80 EH-AY4I 130
EH-XDL64 80 EH-AYH8M 70
EH-XDB64 80 EH-AYG4M 730
EH-XDBL64 80 Positioning, and EH-CU 310
EH-XA16 50 Counter module EH-CUE 310
EH-XAH16 50 EH-POS *2 300 (600)*1
Digital output EH-YR8B 220 Communication EH-SIO 250
module EH-YR12 40 and network EH-RMP2 780
EH-YR16 430 module EH-IOCP2 350
EH-YR16D 430 EH-RMD2 300
EH-YT8 30 EH-IOCD2 250
EH-YTP8 30 EH-IOCA 350
EH-YT16 50 EH-FLN3 350
EH-YTP16 50 EH-LNK 550
EH-YTA16 50 EH-OLNK 550
EH-YTPA16 50 EH-OLNKG 550
EH-YTP16S 50 EH-OLNKE 550
EH-FLN3 350
Dummy module EH-DUM 0

*1 In the case of Positioner connected.


*2 Discontinued product

! Caution
The system of HX-CPU supports a maximum of 11 modules per base units. However, the number of modules
which can be provided depends on the maximum output current of the power module. Make sure to use HX-CPU
in a permissible level of the maximum output current of the power module. Please refer to section 3.3 for list of
current consumption.
3– 5
Chapter 3 General Specifications

MEMO

3– 6
Chapter 4 CPU Module
4.1 Outline
Standard model / Motion model
Module features Type HX-CP1S08 / HX-CP1S08M
Weight Approx. 0.20 kg (0.44 lb)
Current consumption 1,000 mA
Dimensions (mm (in.))

Front cover

Lock button
Battery connector
Error clear switch

RUN LED (green)


Battery /
ERR LED (red)
Battery holder

RUN / STOP switch


2-bit switch (SW1)

7-segment LED Ethernet port


(ETH2)

USB host port (Type: A)


USB device port
(Type mini-B)

Ethernet port
FE terminal
(ETH1)

Front view Bottom view


ETH1 L/A LED (green)

ETH1 SPEED LED (yellow)

ETH2 SPEED LED (yellow)

ETH2 L/A LED (green) Ethernet port


(ETH2)
Detail of Ethernet port

4– 1
Chapter 4 CPU Module

Full function model / CNC motion model / Hybrid model


Module features Type HX-CP1H16 / HX-CP1H16M
HXC-CP1H16
Weight Approx. 0.24 kg (0.53 lb)
Current consumption 1,200 mA
Dimensions (mm (in.))

Front cover

Lock button
READY LED (green)
Battery connector Serial port
ACCESS LED (yellow)
Error clear switch
SD card switch (SW2)
RUN LED (green)
Battery /
Battery holder ERR LED (red)

RUN/STOP switch
2-bit switch (SW1)

7-segment LED Ethernet port


(ETH2)
4-bit switch (SW3)
USB host port (Type: A)
USB device port
SD card slot (Type: mini-B)

Ethernet port
FE terminal
(ETH1)
Ethernet port
(ETH3)
Front view Bottom view
ETH1 L/A LED (green)

ETH3 L/A LED (green) ETH1 SPEED LED (yellow)

ETH2 SPEED LED (yellow)


ETH3 SPEED LED
(yellow)

ETH2 L/A LED (green) Ethernet port


Detail of Ethernet port (ETH2)

4– 2
Chapter 4 CPU Module

Table 4.1 Each description of items in CPU module


No. Item Description
1 RUN LED Indicates operation status. (Green lighting: RUN / off: STOP)
2 ERR LED Indicates error status. (Red blinking: battery error, I/O module mismatch or initialization
of RTC (real time clock) etc. / red lighting: other errors / off: no error)
3 7-segment LED Indicates error code. USB memory
And indicates the status of the USB memory with dot LED “.” STATUS
on the right.
(Lighting: mounting, Blinking: accessing *1, Off: unmount) Reserved
4 USB host port USB host function (Data logging) is supported. User program is needed to use data logging
(Type:A) (File read / write / compare). Support device is USB memory only.
5 USB device port USB port supports gateway function (with HX-CODESYS) only. USB cable is not
(Type:mini-B) included with CPU package nor supplied by Hitachi-IES. Use type Mini-B USB cable.
6 Serial port Serial communication port has an RS-485 interface with terminal. It is supporting Modbus
(Full function model) (master / slave) and general purpose. User program is needed to use general purpose.
7 Ethernet port Ethernet port 1, 2 are available for gateway function (with HX-CODESYS / HMI / OPC),
(ETH 1,2) global network variable and Ethernet communication which is described in Functional
specification list. Do not use other functions if EtherCAT master or EtherNet/IP scanner
function is used.
8 Ethernet port Ethernet port 3 is available for gateway function (with HX-CODESYS / HMI / OPC), global
(ETH 3) network variable and Ethernet communication which is described in Functional specification
(Full function model) list except EtherCAT master and EtherNet/IP scanner function.
9 SD card slot SD / SDHC card are supported. Data logging function is supported. User program is needed
(Full function model) to use data logging (File read / write / compare).
10 RUN / STOP switch When this switch position is in RUN (left), CPU start executing program. At the same
time, remote controlling is enabled, in which case, CPU is started or stopped by HX-
CODESYS over communication.
When this switch position is in STOP (right), CPU stop executing program. In this status,
remote controlling is disabled.
11 Error clear switch If any error occurs, error code is displayed in 7-segment LED and remains after the error
(E.CLR) cause is deactivated. When pressing this button, error code is cleared. If the error cause is
still remaining, error code will be displayed again.
12 SD card switch(SW2) When pressing this switch, SD card is unmounted. Please check lights-out of READY
(Full function model) LED before pull out SD card.
13 ACCESS LED Blinks while the system is reading or writing to SD. *1
(Full function model)
14 READY LED Indicates the status of SD card. Do not pull out SD card during lighting.
(Full function model) (Green lighting: mounting, Off: unmount)
15 SPEED LED Indicates communication speed of each Ethernet port.
(Yellow lighting: 100Mbps, Off: 10Mbps or link-down)
16 L/A LED Indicates the status of each Ethernet communication.
(Green lighting: Ethernet link-up, blinking: Data is sent or received, off: link-down)
17 2-bit switch (SW1) Resetting the factory default settings. Please refer to section 13.2.
18 4-bit switch (SW3) Not supported. Please keep off.
(Full function model)
19 Lock button Press this button to dismount from the base units.
Module can be fixed firmly by a screw of M4×10mm (0.39 in.).
20 Front cover Open this cover when operating the switch, button or replacing the battery.
Keep the cover closed while CPU execute program.
21 Battery holder RTC (real time clock) data is retained by battery. Data specified as RETAIN and
Battery connector PERSISTENT and user program are retained without battery.
-The battery has polarity. When plugging in, check the polarity carefully.
-The battery is not included with CPU package.
-Replace the battery every five years even when doesn’t reach the end of the battery.
22 FE terminal Connect to Class D grounding.
*1 This is supported on CPU Software version 3.5.16.22 or newer.

4– 3
Chapter 4 CPU Module

! Caution
Note the cautions for the communication ports.
Since EtherCAT supports 100 Mbps only, communication error might occur depending on installation environment,
cable length or external noise. In this case, check your installation environments and take appropriate countermeasures
to reduce noise.

4– 4
Chapter 4 CPU Module

4.2 Functional Specifications


Table 4.2 Functional specifications
Specifications
Item
HX-CP1S08 HX-CP1S08M HX-CP1H16 HX-CP1H16M HXC-CP1H16
Model Standard Motion Full Function CNC Motion Hybrid
User program memory *1*2 8 MB 16 MB
Source file memory *1*2 8 MB 16 MB *3
Data memory (non-retain) *1 8 MB 16 MB
Data memory (retain) *1 250 KB 1024 KB
Data memory (persistent) *1 250 KB 1024 KB
Field bus / Marker memory 48 KB
Number of expansion base units 5 units
Expansion cables Between stations: 0.5 m, 1 m, 2 m Total length: Max. 8 m
Number of I/O points (using 64 points module) 4,224 points
I/O modules Same as EH-150 / EHV series
PLC programming language IEC61131-3 compliant 5 languages + CFC
LD: Ladder Diagram IL: Instruction List
FBD: Function Block Diagram ST: Structured Text
SFC: Sequential Function Chart CFC: Continuous Function Chart
C program Adaptation of C / C++ program - 
Data sharing - 
Web server for
- 
application management
I/O update cycle Refresh processing
Execution speed Boolean instruction min. 1.0 ns
Double-precision floating point min. 6.6 ns
Library PLC standard library 
SM3_Basic (for motion) -  -  -
SM3_Robotics (for motion) -  -
SM3_CNC (for motion) -  -
Available OPC UA Server 
communication Web Visualization - 
NTP (network time protocol) 
DNS Client *8 
FTP Server 
FTP Client *8 
EtherCAT Master *4  (Port: ETH1 / ETH2, Communication cycle: Min. 1 ms)
Redundancy EtherCAT *8 
EtherNet/IP Scanner*9 
Modbus-TCP Client 
Modbus-TCP Server  The maximum number of Modbus-TCP client: 16
Modbus-RTU Master  *10 
Modbus-ASCII Master  *10 
Modbus-RTU Slave - 
Modbus-TCP / RTU Gateway *9  *10 
Communication Ethernet 2 ports (10/100BASE-T/TX) 3 ports (10/100BASE-T/TX)
interface Hardening *5 
Certification / Cryptograph *5 -  (ETH3)
Serial - 1 port (RS-485)
USB device 1 port (Mini-B type connector, USB 2.0 High speed)
External storage USB host *6 1 port (A type connector, USB 2.0 High speed) for USB memory
SD memory card slot *6 - 1 slot (SD / SDHC)
Display and Display RUN LED, ERR LED, 7-segment LED (2 digits)
switch RUN / STOP switch STOP / RUN (Remote control of RUN / STOP over communication from
HX-CODESYS is enable when switch position is in RUN.)
Error clear switch Clear of error code
2-bit switch (SW1) Reset the factory default settings
4-bit switch (SW3) - Reserved for future

4– 5
Chapter 4 CPU Module

Table 4.2 Functional specifications


Specifications
Item
HX-CP1S08 HX-CP1S08M HX-CP1H16 HX-CP1H16M HXC-CP1H16
Model Standard Motion Full Function CNC Motion Hybrid
Real-time clock Built-in RTC (deviation ±60 s / month at 25 °C)
Battery (Option for RTC) HX-BAT (for RTC)
Startup time *7 About 20 to 30 s About 70s or more
Maintenance function Self-diagnosis (microcomputer error, watchdog timer error, memory error,
battery under-voltage detection, and others)
Supported standards UL/cUL, CE, RCM UL/cUL, CE
*1 Since additional information needs to be saved, available memory size is slightly smaller than nominal value.
*2 The displayed size in File window of HX-CODESYS may exceed the specification because the stored data is compressed by the
file system.
*3 Data for Web Visualization is stored in the source file memory.
*4 EtherCAT master function must be configured as stand alone. Do not configure other function with EtherCAT master function.
*5 The security protection support function of each system component is just one way to ensure a security level required for the system
and does not mean that it completely protects the system from increasing security risks. To responsibly implement and maintain a
necessary security level, continued improvement is required. You need to clarify the system security protection target and take
necessary measures before building and operating the system.
*6 File access is available on user program and FTP client.
*7 Depends on the size of the user program.
*8 Supported on CPU firmware version 3.5.13.40.
*9 Supported on CPU firmware version 3.5.16.22.
*10 EH-SIO module is needed.

Table 4.3 EtherCAT functional specifications


Item Specification
Protocol EtherCAT® protocol (CoE)
Supported communication profiles CoE (PDO , SDO)
Synchronization (DC) Supported
Physical layer 100BASE-TX
Modulation system Baseband communication
Transmission speed 100 Mbps (100BASE-TX)
Duplex mode Full duplex / Auto MDI
Topology Daisy-chain, tree
Transmission medium Twisted pair cable more over category 5 with shield
Transmission range Max. 100 m between nodes (IEEE802.3)
Maximum number of slaves 255
Maximum process data size Input 5,736 bytes / Output 5,736 bytes
Maximum data size of slave Input 1,434 bytes / Output 1,434 bytes
Maximum massage size 2,048 bytes
Communication cycle time Min. 1 ms
Process data communication ・PDO Mapping with the CoE protocol
・Redundant communication even in a slave malfunction
・Stop operation in a slave malfunction
SDO communication CoE
・Emergency message server (receive from slave)
・SDO request / Response
Configuration ・Setting node address by network scan from programming tool (HX-CODESYS)
・Display of network information
RAS function ・Slave configuration check in the network starting
・Read-out of the error information
・Trouble shoot information
Slave information ・Slave valid / invalid
・joining / out-network of a slave (Slave option)
Mail box ・CoE (CAN open / CAN application layer over EtherCAT)
Redundancy Available on the CPU firmware version 3.5.13.40 or newer

4– 6
Chapter 4 CPU Module

Table 4.4 Programming functional specifications


Item Specification
Task Number of periodic task 32
Specifi- periodic task priority 0 to 31
cations Number of event task 8
System event 25 kinds such as Run / Stop
Number of status task 8
Number of freewheeling task 1
Kinds of POU Program, Function block, Function
Data Types Bool BOOL, BYTE, WORD, DWORD, LWORD
Integer SINT, INT, DINT, LINT
Unsigned integer USINT, UINT, UDINT, ULINT
Real REAL, LREAL
String STRING, WSTRING
Time TIME (T), LTIME (LT)
Date / time of day TIME_OF_DAY (TOD), DATE_AND_TIME (DT), DATE (D)
Others STRUCT, UNION, ARRAY, ENUMERATION, SUBRANGE, REFERENCE,
POINTER, ANY, BIT
Array number of dimensions 3
Instructions Arithmetic instructions ADD, MUL, SUB, DIV, MOD, MOVE
Boolean instructions AND, OR, XOR, NOT
Bit shift SHL, SHR, ROL, ROR
Selection SEL, MAX, MIN, LIMIT, MUX
Comparison GT, LT, LE, GE, EQ, NE
Call CAL
Type conversion BOOL_TO_INT, WORD_TO_INT, and so on
Arithmetic Functions ABS, SQRT, LN, LOG, EXP, SIN, COS, TAN, ASIN, ACOS, ATAN, EXPT
IEC extension DELETE, ISVALIDREF, NEW, QUERYINTERFACE, QUERYPOINTER,
AND_THEN, OR_ELSE, TRY, CATCH, FINALLY, ENDTRY, INDEXOF,
ADR, BITADR, INDEXOF, SIZEOF, ANDN, ORN, XORN
Standard Flip-Flop RS, SR
library Counter CTD, CTU, CTUD
STRING Functions CONCAT, DELETE, FIND, INSERT, LEFT, LEN, MID, REPLACE, RIGHT
Timer TOF, TON, TP
Edge Detection F_TRIG, R_TRIG
Others RTC
Other UTIL BCD Conversions BCD_TO_INT, INT_TO_BCD
library Bit / Byte Functions EXTRACT, PACK, PUTBIT, UNPACK
(extract)
Mathematic DEREVATIVE, INTEGRAM LIN_TRAFO, STATISTICS_INT,
Auxiliary Functions STATISTICS_REAL,VARIANCE
PID PD, PID, PID_FIXCYCLE
Signal Generators BLINK, FREQ_MEASURE, GEN
Function CHARCURVE, RAMP_INT, RAMP_REAL
Manipulators
Analog Value HYSTERESIS, LIMITALARM
Processing
FILE Directory DirClose, DirCreate, DirList, DirOpen, DirRemove, DirRename
File Close, Copy, Delet, EOF, Flush, GetAttribute, GetPos, GetSize,
GetTime, Open, Read, Rename, SetPos, Write
DTU GetDateAndTime, SetDateAndTime

4– 7
Chapter 4 CPU Module

4.3 Ethernet Port Specifications


HX-CPU standard model and motion model have two Ethernet port (ETH1 / 2), and full function model, CNC motion
model and Hybrid model have three Ethernet port (ETH1 / 2 / 3).
Front view

ETH1

ETH2

ETH3

Bottom view

Figure 4.1 HX-CPU Ethernet port

(1) Supported communication function


Table 4.5 Supported function of Ethernet port
No. Function ETH1 ETH2 ETH3 Description
1 Gateway ✓ ✓ ✓ Max. 32 channels incl. HMI
2 Global network variable ✓ ✓ ✓
3 OPC-UA Server ✓ ✓ ✓
4 Web Visualization ✓ ✓ ✓ Full function / CNC motion / Hybrid model
5 NTP Client ✓ ✓ ✓
6 FTP Server ✓ ✓ ✓
7 FTP Client ✓ ✓ ✓ Supported on CPU firmware version 3.5.13.40
8 EtherCAT Master*1 ✓ ✓ -
9 Modbus-TCP ✓ ✓ ✓
10 Socket comm. (TCP/IP, UDP/IP) ✓ ✓ ✓
11 EtherNet/IP Scanner*1 ✓ ✓ - Supported on CPU firmware version 3.5.16.22
*1 Each port is available using more than one function at a time except EtherCAT master or EtherNet/IP scanner
function. Do not configure the other function with EtherCAT master or EtherNet/IP scanner function.

(2) Ethernet port specification


Table 4.6 Ethernet port specification

Item Specifications
Ethernet Standard 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX
Transmission mode AUTO (100 Mbps full, 100 Mbps half, 10 Mbps full, 10 Mbps half)
Modulation system Baseband
Topology Star
Transmission medium Category 5 STP or UTP (STP recommended)
Maximum segment length Max. 100 m between nodes
Connector 8-pin modular connector RJ45
Function EtherCAT Master, Modbus-TCP Server / Client, FTP Server / Client, Network variable,
CODESYS Gateway (TCP/IP, UDP/IP) , Socket Comm. (TCP/IP, UDP/IP), NTP, DNS,
Web Visualization (HTTP / HTTPS), EtherNet/IP Scanner

4– 8
Chapter 4 CPU Module

ETH1・ETH2 ETH3
Pin No. Signal name
1 TX+
[8] [1] 2 TX-
3 RX+
4 NC
5 NC
[1] [8] 6 RX-
7 NC
8 NC

Figure 4.2 HX-CPU Ethernet port connector pin assigned and signal name

(3) IP address default


Table 4.7 Default IP address of Ethernet port
ETH1 ETH2 ETH3
Default IP address 192.168.0.1 192.168.1.1 192.168.2.1

(4) LED specification (ETH1 to 3)


ETH1 L/A LED (green)

ETH3 L/A LED (green) ETH1 SPEED LED (yellow)

ETH2 SPEED LED (yellow)


ETH3 SPEED LED
(yellow)

ETH2 L/A LED (green) Ethernet port


(ETH2)

Figure 4.3 Ethernet communication port LED

Table 4.8 Ethernet port LED specification


LED Color Status Remarks
ON LINK established
L/A
Green Blinking During communication
(Link / Activity)
OFF Not connected or LINK unestablished
ON 100 Mbps
SPEED Yellow
OFF 10 Mbps

(5) Available receiving port No.


Table 4.9 Ethernet port No.
Port No. *1 Remarks
20 FTP server (Transmission data)
21 FTP server (control)
53 DNS client
123 NTP client (UDP/IP)
443, 8080 CODESYS Webserver (Web Visualization)
502 Modbus-TCP server
1202 Network variable (UDP/IP)
1217 Gateway communication (TCP/IP)
1740 to 1743 CODESYS gateway (UDP/IP)
2222, 44818 EtherNet/IP Scanner
4000 to 4007 CAA.NetBaseService Socket Comm. (UDP/IP and TCP/IP)
4840 CODESYS OPC-UA server
11740 CODESYS gateway (TCP/IP)
*1 The port number cannot be changed.

4– 9
Chapter 4 CPU Module

(6) OPC-UA server specifications


Table 4.10 OPC-UA specifications
Item Specification
Supported version 1.03
Protocol Binary protocol (opc.tcp)
Secure communication 3.5.13.41 or older: Not supported
3.5.16.22 or newer: Supported

4 – 10
Chapter 4 CPU Module

4.4 USB Port Specifications


Front view

USB-A (Host)

USB-B (Device)

Figure 4.4 USB port

(1) USB-A (Host)


USB-A port is a USB host port for a USB memory. (Connector:Type-A)
It supports the data storage function. User program is required to handle files in the USB memory. Available device is
USB memory only. Be sure to check environmental conditions of the USB memory and use it in the rated range. The
specifications of the USB memory may be changed by the manufacturer, which could lead to unexpected behavior.
Note the cautions described in the section 4.5 and be sure to test carefully in advance.
(2) USB-B (Device)
USB-B port supports a gateway (Connection with a HX-CODESYS) function. (Connector:Type-miniB) Use a
standard USB cable with ferrite core in the market.

Table 4.11 USB port specification


Items Specification
Standard USB 2.0 High Speed (480 Mbps)
Connector A type
File system FAT16, FAT32, ext2, ext3, ext4
USB-A Maximum Volume 32 GB
(Host) 1 file maximum volume 2 GB
Bus power 500 mA
Distance 5m
Function Access USB memory (Data logging, file operation, etc.)
Standard USB 2.0 High Speed (480 Mbps)
USB-B Connector mini-B type
(Device) Distance 5m
Function CODESYS gateway

4 – 11
Chapter 4 CPU Module

4.5 SD Card Specifications

SDcard slot

Figure 4.5 SD card

Full function model, CNC motion model and Hybrid model support a SD card. User program is required to handle files
in the SD card. Be sure to check an environmental condition of the SD card and use it in the rated range. The
specifications of the SD card memory may be changed by the manufacturer, which could lead to unexpected behavior.
Note the cautions described below and be sure to test carefully in advance.

Table 4.12 SD card specification


Items Specification
Standard SD (up to 2 GB) , SDHC (2 to 32 GB)
Bus interface Normal speed, High speed
Bus speed Max. 25 MB/s
Version 2.00
SD card
File system FAT16, FAT32, ext2, ext3, ext4
Maximum volume 32 GB
1 file maximum size 2 GB
Function Access SD card (Data logging, File operation, etc.)

Caution
Select a USB memory or SD card according to the purpose. There are several types of recording method on USB memory
and SD card, mainly SLC (Single Level Cell), MLC (Multi Level Cell), TLC (Triple Level Cell). SLC is the most
durable and reliable and followed by MLC and TLC in this order. However, the amount of data that can be stored in the
device is the smallest for SLC. We recommend selecting the appropriate one in accordance with the importance of the
data to be stored. The more frequently data is written or erased, the shorter the life of USB memory and SD cards are.
When creating an application, design it to reduce the frequency of writing / erasing by buffering the memory in the HX-
CPU.

There are cases that the file system of the USB memory or SD card corrupts by the unexpected power disconnection
like instantaneous power interruption. In this case, formatting of USB memory / SD card is needed. Please use USB
memory / SD card after formatting as journaling file system; ext3 or ext4 in order to avoid the corruption of the file
system. Please use third-party software to handle ext3 / ext4 format device in Windows® because Windows® does not
support these format as default.

4 – 12
Chapter 4 CPU Module

4.6 Serial Port Specifications

Full function model, CNC motion model and Hybrid model has 2-wired RS-485 serial port. It supports Modbus-RTU
master, Modbus-RTU slave, Modbus-ASCII master* and general communication.

Table 4.13 Serial port specification


items Specification
Baud rate 4,800 bps, 9,600 bps, 19,200 bps, 38,400 bps, 57,600 bps, 115,200 bps
Interface RS-485
Max. cable length 500 m
Max. number of devices 32
Communication mode Half duplex
Synchronization method Start-stop synchronization
Transmission method Serial transmission (bit serial transmission)
Transmission format 7/8 bits, non/odd/even parity, 1/2 stop bit
Transmission sequence Sent from the lowest bit
Error detection Vertical parity check, sum check, overrun check, framing check
Max. message length 4,095 bytes (incl. control characters)
Protocol General purpose, Modbus-RTU master, Modbus-RTU slave, Modbus-ASCII master*
* Supported on CPU firmware version 3.5.13.40

4 – 13
Chapter 4 CPU Module

Front view
Serial port

Front view

Figure 4.6 Serial communication port

Cable side connector

[1]SP Pin no. Signal Silk Description


[2]SN [5]FG
MPU [4]SN 5 FG FG Frame ground
[3]SP 4 SN - Transmitting data-
3 SP + Transmitting data+
[3]SP [2]SN
[4]SN 2 SN - Transmitting data-
[1]SP
1 SP + Transmitting data+
[5]FG

Figure 4.7 Serial port Circuit and pin no.

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5]

SP SP SP
SN SN SN ・・・

Figure 4.8 RS-485 signal connection diagram

Applicable cable is 0.2 mm2 – 1.25 mm2. (AWG 24 - 16)

Depending on the noise environment, connect the shielded wire to FG terminal. This terminal must not connect to ground.

If the HX-CPU is installed at the terminal of communication line, install a termination resistor. A resistor (120 Ω, 1 %, 1/4 W, metal

film) is included in the package of HX-CPU.

4 – 14
Chapter 4 CPU Module

4.7 Battery Specifications

The battery is optional and not included in the package. Use the battery in case of followings.
- Realtime clock is used and the data must be retained in 8 days or more of power failure time.
- Realtime clock is used and HX-CPU is used in ambient temperature 50 °C or more.
If realtime clock data is taken from NTP server, the battery is not necessary.
Battery is not required for user program and retained data memory because they are stored in nonvolatile memory.

Type : HX-BAT

Figure 4.9 HX-CPU battery (option)

Follow the steps below to install the battery to HX-CPU. Be careful about the polarity of the battery.

How to install the battery


1] Prepare a new battery. (HX-BAT)
2] Keep power supplied to the PLC.
3] Remove the old battery from the battery case, and disconnect the cable plug.
4] Plug the cable of the new battery to the connector on the CPU module.
(Red cable to [+], black cable to [-])
5] Fold the excess cable and hook the cable guide.
(Otherwise, the cable may be nipped by the front cover.)
If replacing the battery without power supplied, power off time should be less than 30 minute.

[+] lead (Red)


Battery holder Front view

Front cover
[ - ] lead( Black)
Battery connector

Battery connector
Battery

Figure 4.10 Install battery

4 – 15
Chapter 4 CPU Module

Refer to the following tables for lifetime of the battery.


Table 4.14 Battery life

Battery life (Total time interruption of power supply ) [ Hr ]


Guaranteed value (MIN) @55 °C Actual value (MAX) @25 °C
25,000 67,000

- When using the battery, enable the battery error detection. Refer to the manual section 2.6 Configuration of HX
series application manual (Software).
- The life time of the battery means the total of power failure time.
- When ERR LED is displayed flashing or the 7-segment LED is displayed 71, replace the battery within 7 days.
- The durable life of the battery is 5 years. Even if the battery is not empty, replace it every 5 years.

! DANGER
Precaution when handling the battery.
Use HX-BAT for the new battery. Be careful because a false replacement may cause the battery to
explode. Do not connect + and - of the battery reversely, do not charge disassemble, heat them, throw
them into the fire, short circuit them.

! CAUTION
Disposal (collection) of the battery
Old battery should be individually put in plastic bag or something similar (to prevent short circuit)
and follow your local recycling regulations.

4 – 16
Chapter 5 Power Supply, Base, I/O Controller
5.1 Power Supply Module

Name and function of each part Type EH-PSA (Approx. 0.36 kg (0.79 lb))
(Weight) HX-PSA (Approx. 0.36 kg (0.79 lb))
EH-PSD (Approx. 0.28 kg (0.62 lb))

POWER lamp
HX-PSD (Approx. 0.28 kg (0.62 lb))
EH-PSR (Approx. 0.36 kg (0.79 lb))
Front cover
Dimensions
(mm (in.))

60 (2.36) 95 (3.74)

100 (3.94)
Power terminal block Front cover set screw

Explanation of Converts power supplied externally into the power (5 V DC) which can be used inside the HX-CPU.
function The operating status can be confirmed with the POWER lamp on the front of the module.
There are two types of the external supply voltage, AC type (100 to 240 V AC) and DC type (21.6 to 26.4 V DC).
And there is a redundant power supply that is using as large capacity power supply on the standard base.
Refer to a specification table for details.
Name Description LED
POWER lamp AC power supply: Green
When the lamp lights up, indicates that the AC power is supplied.
When the lamp is off, indicates that the AC power is not turned on or the output of the
DC power short-circuits.
When the lamp is flashing, indicates that the power has exceeded the rated output.
DC power supply:
When the lamp lights up, indicates that the DC power is supplied.
When the lamp is off, indicates that the DC power is not turned on, the power output
short-circuits, or there is a voltage overload.
Redundant power supply:
When the lamp lights up, indicates that the AC power is supplied.
When the lamp is off, indicates that the AC power is not turned on or there is an error
in power supply unit.
Front cover / Front cover Open and close this cover when wiring cable. Keep the front cover closed during operation.
set screw Cut the power off first to avoid getting an electric shock when opening the cover.
Use M3 × 6 mm (0.24 ft.) screws for the set screws if fixing is necessary.
Power terminal block This terminal block is used for output wiring of 24 V DC and for wiring of ground when the power is
being supplied externally.
The recommended crimp terminal is indicate below.

6 (Recommended) 6.4
Take great care on handling 7.62
6 the terminal because it may
M3 screw
Unit: mm fall off if the screw is loose. 12

5– 1
Chapter 5 Power Supply, Base, I/O Controller,

(1) EH-PSA / HX-PSA

Item Specification
Rated output voltage 5 V DC 24 V DC
Maximum DC output current 3.8 A 0.4 A
Efficiency Min. 65 % (Load of 5 V 3.8 A 24 V 0.4 A after conducting electricity for 5 minutes at room
temperature and humidity)
Input voltage range 85 to 264 V AC wide range
Input current Max. 1 A (85 to 264 V AC)
Input rush current Max. 50 A (Ta=25 °C), Max. 100 A (Ta=55 °C)
Output overcurrent protection Output short-circuit protection
Instantaneous power failure Less than 10 ms (85 to 100 V AC), less than 20 ms (Exceed 100 V AC to 264 V AC)
guarantee
Input leak current Max. 3.5 mA (60 Hz, 264 V AC)
Dielectric withstand voltage 1 minute at 1,500 V AC between (AC input) and (DC output)
1 minute at 750 V AC between (DC output) and (FE)
Insulation resistance Min. 20 MΩ (500 V DC) (1) Between AC input and FE
(2) Between AC input and DC output

Terminal configuration Diagram of internal circuit

[1] 24 V DC+ Output + Fuse *1


Connect when using
[1] 24 V DC.
[2] 24 V DC- 24 V DC –
[2]
Input Fuse *1
[3] [3] N.C. Do not connect. Output
100 to 240 AC / DC
[4] V AC Converter +
[4] 100 to 240 V AC
Connect the input – 5 V DC
[5]
power.
[6] [5] 100 to 240 V AC

Connect to Class D FE
[6] FE
grounding.
*1 The POWER lamp does not light up if a fuse blows. And the module needs repairs.
User cannot replace the fuse.

5– 2
Chapter 5 Power Supply, Base, I/O Controller

(2) EH-PSD / HX-PSD

Item Specification
Rated output voltage 5 V DC
Maximum DC output current 3.8 A
Efficiency Min. 70 % (Load at 5 V DC 3.8 A)
Input voltage range 21.6 to 26.4 V DC
Input current Max. 1.25 A (with 24 V DC)
Input rush current Max. 50 A (Ta=25 °C), Max. 100 A (Ta=55 °C)
Output overcurrent protection Output short-circuit protection
Instantaneous power failure guarantee Less than 1 ms (21.6 to 26.4 V DC)
Dielectric withstand voltage 1 minute at 1,500 V AC between DC input and FE
Insulation resistance Min. 20 MΩ (500 V DC) (Between DC input and FE)
Insulation method Non insulation

Terminal configuration Diagram of internal circuit

[1] 24 V DC+
Connect the input power.
[2] 24 V DC-
Connect to Class D grounding. Fuse *1
[3] FE Connect with 24 V DC(-) because DC / DC
[1] of supporting CE marking. Input Converter Output
Note 24V DC 5V DC
[2]
Be sure to remove the connection between FE and 24V
[3] DC(-) in the insulation resistance measurement and the
dielectric withstand voltage test. FE

*1 The POWER lamp does not light up if a fuse blows. And the module needs repairs.
User cannot replace the fuse.

5– 3
Chapter 5 Power Supply, Base, I/O Controller,

(3) EH-PSR

Item Specifications
Rated output voltage 5 V DC
Maximum output current 5.6 A(up to 45 deg ambient temp), 5.0 A(from 45 to 55 deg)
Efficiency Min. 65 % (Load of 5 V 5.6 A after energizing for
5 minutes at room temperature and humidity)
Input rated voltage range 85 to 264 V AC wide range
Input current Max. 1 A (85 to 264 V AC)
Input rush current Max. 50 A (Ta=25 °C), Max. 100 A (Ta=55 °C)
Output over current protection Output short circuit protection
Instantaneous power failure guarantee Less than 5 ms (85 to 100 V AC), less than 20 ms (100 to 264 V AC)
Input leak current Max. 3.5 mA (60 Hz, 264 V AC)
Dielectric withstand voltage 1 minute at 1,500 V AC between (AC input) and (DC output)
1 minute at 750 V AC between (DC output) and (FE)
Insulation resistance Min. 20 MΩ (500 V DC) (1) Between AC input and FE
(2) Between AC input and DC output
Error output Relay 24 V DC, 0.5A

Terminal configuration Diagram of internal circuit

[1] Error output


Relay contact
[1] for error output
[2] Error output Error
[2] output
Don't connect
[3] N.C. Fuse *1
[3] any wire. Input
Output
[4] 100 to 240 V 100 to 240 AC / DC
[4] +
AC Connect V AC converter
[5] AC power – 5 V DC
100 to 240 V
[5]
[6] AC

[6] FE Connect to ground FE

*1 When fuse was blown, the POWER lamp don't light. Also the module must repair by manufacture.
It is impossible to replace the blown flow by customer.
[ Available combination ]
Base・Power EH-PSA / PSD EH-PSR
supply EH-BS8R EH-BS3A,5A,6A,8A EH-BS11A EH-BS8R EH-BS3A,5A,6A,8A EH-BS11A
CPU
HX-CPU Not Available Available Available in Restricted use *2 Restricted
available redundant use *2
*1 power
supply
system
*1 EH-PSA/PSD are not mounted in EH-BS8R. And it cannot monitor the operation status.
*2 Redundant power supply module (EH-PSR) is possible to use as large capacity power supply on the standard base. But it can not
monitor the operation status.
[ Monitor of operation status ]
Combination of EH-PSR+HX-CPU, operation status can monitor as input data of slot A.

In EH-BS8R, 8 IO modules are available.


The status of power supply can monitor as input data of slot A.
Input %IX*.0:power supply 0 operation is correct
Input %IX*.1:power supply 1 operation is correct
Pow 0 Pow1 “*” is variable depending on the mounting situations of the module.

5– 4
Chapter 5 Power Supply, Base, I/O Controller

5.2 Base Unit


(1) Standard base unit

Name and function of each part Type EH-BS3A (Approx. 0.22 kg (0.48 lb))
(Weight) EH-BS5A (Approx. 0.28 kg (0.62 lb))
Connector for power module Connector for CPU module Mounting hole×4 EH-BS6A (Approx. 0.31 kg (0.68 lb))
EH-BS8A (Approx. 0.36 kg (0.79 lb))
EH-BS11A (Approx. 0.4 kg (0.88 lb))
Dimensions
(mm (in.))

Connector for L1 14 (0.55)


Optional board
Mounting lever for fixing to DIN rail×2
Connector for I/O module

90 (3.54)

100 (3.91)
Expansion cable connector

Cover for expansion cable connector

L2

L1 (Outer L2 (Mounted
Communication slot (Slot for only communication module) dimensions) dimensions)
EH-BS3A Slot 0 to 2 EH-BS3A 222.5(8.76) 207(8.15)
EH-BS5A Slot 0 to 4 EH-BS5A 282.5(11.2) 267(10.51)
EH-BS6A Slot 0 to 5 EH-BS6A 312.5(12.31) 297(10.70)
EH-BS8A Slot 0 to 7 EH-BS8A 372.5(14.67) 357(14.06)
EH-BS11A Slot 0 to 7 (Slot 8,9,A cannot install EH-BS11A 462.5(18.21) 447(17.6)
a communication module.)

Explanation of function This is a basic unit for installing all modules. Power is supplied from the power module to each of the
other modules, using the base unit. Also, signals are transmitted to each module from the CPU
module or the I/O controller.
Select the base unit according to the number of I/O modules to be used.
Item Description
Connector for power module This is a connector for installing the power module.
Connector for Optional board This connector is not used with HX-CPU.
Connector for CPU module This is a connector for installing the CPU module. This becomes a connector for installing the I/O
controller when using the unit as an expansion base.
Connector for I/O module This is a connector for installing the I/O module.

Expansion cable connector This is a connector for connecting the expansion cable.
Mounting hole (4 locations) These are used when attaching the base unit to a panel, etc. Use M4×20 mm (0.79 in.) screws.
Mounting lever for fixing to This is used when mounting to a DIN rail.
DIN rail
Cover for expansion cable This cover is used for protecting the expansion cable connector when it is not used.
connector

5– 5
Chapter 5 Power Supply, Base, I/O Controller,

(2) Redundant base unit

Name and function of each part Type(Weight) EH-BS8R (0.39 kg (0.86 lb))
Dimension(mm (in.))

Connector for power module Connector for CPU Mounting hole×4


L1 14

90

100
L2
Connector for optional board

Mounting lever for fixing to DIN rale


Connector for IO module
Expansion cable connector

Cover for expansion cable connector Unit:mm L1 L2


(Outer (Mounted
Communication slot dimensions) dimensions)
EH-BS8R Slot 0 to 7 EH-BS8R 432.5(17.01) 417(16.42)

Function This is a basic unit for installing all modules. Power is supplied from the power module to each of
the other modules, using the base unit. Also, signals are transmitted to each module from the CPU
module or the I/O controller.
Item Description
Connector for power module This is a connector for installing the power module.
Connector for Optional board This connector is not used with HX-CPU.
Connector for CPU module This is a connector for installing the CPU module. This becomes a connector for installing the I/O
controller when using the unit as an expansion base.
Connector for I/O module This is a connector for installing the I/O module.

Expansion cable connector This is a connector for connecting the expansion cable.
Mounting hole (4 locations) These are used when attaching the base unit to a panel, etc. Use M4×20 mm (0.79 in.) screws.
Mounting lever for fixing to This is used when mounting to a DIN rail.
DIN rail
Cover for expansion cable This cover is used for protecting the expansion cable connector when it is not used.
connector

5– 6
Chapter 5 Power Supply, Base, I/O Controller

[ Error output, Operation status ]


Error output and operation status will be change according to occurrence of error and power ON / OFF as follows.
Pow 0 Pow1
Operation status

Input %IX*.0

* is variable depending on the mounting

situations of the module..

FFB0 FFB1

The other side power turn ON Both power turn ON

FFB0 ON
OFF

FFB1 ON
Pow0 output trouble occur
OFF
Pow0 return from trouble

Operation status ON: normal


of Pow 0 OFF :abnormal Pow1 output trouble occur
%IX*.0
Pow1 return from trouble

Operation status ON: normal


of Pow 1 OFF: abnormal
%IX*.1

Error output 0 ON: abnormal


OFF: normal

Error output 1 ON: abnormal


OFF: normal

Time chart of Error output and Operation status

[ Replacement of fault power supply module ]

In case of fault the power supply module, it is possible to replace while operating another power supply module.

1. To easily replace the fault module, install the circuit breaker to each power line.
2. Please replace the fault module as the power off.
Please attention the electric shock, because another power supply module is operating.

Please design the system of 5 V capacity is used as one power supply module when the redundant power supply.

5– 7
Chapter 5 Power Supply, Base, I/O Controller,

5.3 I/O Controller

Name and function of each part Type (Weight) EH-IOCH2 (Approx 0.14 kg (0.31 lb))
Lock button Dimensions
(mm (in.))

45 (1.77) 95 (3.74)
Unit No. switch

100 (3.94)
At shipment: 1
Setable range: 1 to 5

Expansion cable connector

Explanation of function I/O controller is a module to output the output signal from the CPU module to the output module mounted
on the expansion base unit and to transmit the input signal of the input module to the CPU module.
I/O controller is attached adjacent to the power module of the expansion base unit on the right side.
For the unit No. switch, please set 1 to 5 from the unit closer to the CPU module in order.
Note)
- If other than 1 to 5 of the unit No. switch is set, it does not operate normally.

Item Description
Lock button Press this button to dismount. Module can be fixed firmly by a screw of
M4 × 10 mm (0.39 in.).
Unit No. switch This is a rotary switch for setting the unit No.
Please set 1 to 5 from the unit closer to the CPU module in order.
Example) 1 -> 2 -> 3, 2 -> 4 -> 5, 1 -> 3 -> 5
Always turns off the power supply when setting.
Take care because it may operate abnormally if the unit No. is not set in order.
Expansion cable This is a connector to connect an expansion cable.
connector Connect with the former base unit using the expansion cable.

5– 8
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module
6.1 Outline
(1) The appearance of 16-point I/O module
Name and function of each part EH-XD8 (Approx.0.16 kg (0.35 lb))
EH-XD16, EH-XDL16,
EH-XDS16,
EH-XDA16 (Approx.0.16 kg (0.35 lb))
EH-XA16, EH-XAH16 (Approx.0.18 kg (0.41 lb))

Type EH-YT8, EH-YTP8 (Approx.0.16 kg (0.35 lb))


(Weight) EH-YT16, EH-YTP16,
EH-YTA16, EH-YTPA16,
EH-YTP16S (Approx.0.16 kg (0.35 lb))
EH-YR8B (Approx.0.16 kg (0.35 lb))
EH-YR12 (Approx.0.20 kg (0.44 lb))
EH-YR16, EH-YR16D (Approx.0.24 kg (0.53 lb))
Terminal block cover EH-YS16 (Approx.0.23 kg (0.51 lb))
Dimensions
(mm (in.))

30 (1.18) 95 (3.74)

Terminal block
100 (3.94)

Name Description
Terminal block This is a terminal block for connecting the I/O signals. The terminal block can be connected and
disconnected.
The screws for the terminal block are M3 screws. Use a crimp terminal fitting a screw diameter.
The maximum thickness of the cable should be 0.75 mm2. (Use 0.5 mm2 cable when attaching 2 crimp
terminals to the same terminal.)
The recommended crimp terminal is indicated below.
6.4
6 (0.24) (Recommended)
7.6
Take great care on handling
6 (0.24) the terminal because it may
fall off if the screw is loose. M3 screw
Unit: mm (in.)
8.2

Terminal block cover This is a cover for installing on the terminal block.

A front view of LED Indicated contents

0 1 2 3
4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 LED of the number that the I/O signal turns on lights up.
12 13 14 15
DC INPUT EH-XD16

6– 1
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(2) The appearance of 32-point I/O module


Name and function of each part EH-XD32, EH-XDL32, EH-XDS32,
EH-XDB32, EH-XDBL32,
Type
LED display switch EH-XTT32 (Approx. 0.12 kg (0.26 lb))
(Weight)
ON
EH-YT32, EH-YTP32 (Approx. 0.11 kg (0.24 lb))
OFF
EH-YTT32 (Approx. 0.12 kg (0.26 lb))
Dimensions
(mm (in.))

External wiring connector 30 (1.18) 95 (3.74)

Type 100 (3.94) EH-XD32E, EH-XDL32E (Approx. 0.15 kg (0.33 lb))


LED display switch
(Weight) EH-YT32E, EH-YTP32E (Approx. 0.15 kg (0.33 lb))
ON
OFF Dimensions
(mm (in.))

External wiring connector 30 (1.18) 104 (4.09)


100 (3.94)

LED display switch EH-XD32H (Approx. 0.12 kg (0.26 lb))


Type
ON (Weight) EH-YT32H (Approx. 0.12 kg (0.26 lb))
OFF
Dimensions
(mm (in.))

30 (1.18) 95 (3.74)
External wiring connector
(Compatible with EM/H-200
series)
100 (3.94)

Name Specification
LED display switch This switch is used to switch the group to be displayed, in the I/O display.
External wiring connector This is a connector for connecting the I/O signal.

6– 2
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

A front view of LED Indicated contents

LED of the number that the I/O signal turns on lights up.
LED display switch is switched as follows.
0 1 2 3 +16
4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 Switch LED +16 Display group
12 13 14 15
DC INPUT EH-XD32 OFF No lighting 0 to 15
ON Lighting 16 to 31

(3) The appearance of 64-point I/O module


Name and function of each part EH-XD64, EH-XDL64 (Approx. 0.14 kg (0.31 lb))
Type
LED display switch EH-XDB64, EH-XDBL64 (Approx. 0.14 kg (0.31 lb))
(Weight)
SW2 EH-YT64, EH-YTP64 (Approx. 0.13 kg (0.29 lb))
SW1
Dimensions
(mm (in.))

30 (1.18) 95 (3.74)

External wiring connector


100 (3.94)

Item Description
LED display switch This switch is used to switch the group to be displayed, in the I/O display.

External wiring connector This is a connector for connecting the I/O signals.

A front view of LED Indicated contents

LED of the number that the I/O signal turns on lights up.
LED display switch is switched as follows.

0 1 2 3 16 SW1 SW2 LED 16 LED 32 Display group


4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 32 OFF OFF Non- lighting Non-lighting 0 to 15
12 13 14 15
DC INPUT EH-XD64 ON OFF Lighting Non-lighting 16 to 31
OFF ON Non-lighting Lighting 32 to 47
ON ON Lighting Lighting 48 to 63

6– 3
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(4) The appearance of TTL input output module


Name and function of each part Type (Weight) EH-MTT32 (Approx. 0.12 kg (0.26 lb))

LED display switch


Dimensions
(mm (in.))
SW
ON
OFF

30 95
LED cover

External wiring connector


(Compatible with EM/H-200)

100
Type (Weight) EH-MTT32A (Approx. 0.12 kg (0.26 lb))
LED display switch Dimensions
ON
(mm (in.))
OFF

30 95

External wiring connector


100

Item Description
LED display switch This switch is used to switch the group to be displayed in the I/O display.

External wiring connector This is a connector for connecting the I/O signal.

A front view of LED Indicated contents


LED of the number that the I/O signal turns on lights up.
0 1 2 3 LED display switch is switched as follows.
IN
4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 OUT Switch position IN LED OUT LED Display group (LED No. 0 to 15)
12 13 14 15
TTL I/O EH-MTT32 OFF Lighting (Green) OFF TTL Input (0 to 15)
ON OFF Lighting (Green) TTL Output (16 to 31)

LED of the number that the I/O signal turns on lights up.
0 1 2 3 OUT
LED display switch is switched as follows.
4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 Switch position OUT LED Display group (LED No. 0 to 15)
12 13 14 15
TTL I/O EH-MTT32A OFF OFF TTL Input (0 to 15)
ON Lighting (Green) TTL Output (16 to 31)

6– 4
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

6.2 Specifications
(1) EH-XD8

Specification EH-XD8
Input type DC input (common use to sink and source)
Number of input points 8 points
Input voltage 24 V DC (19.2 to 30 V DC)
Input current Approx. 6.9 mA
Input impedance Approx. 3.5 kΩ
Operating ON voltage Min. 15 V
voltage OFF voltage Max. 5 V
Input response ON response Max. 5 ms
time OFF response Max. 5 ms
Insulation system Photo-coupler insulation
Input display LED display (green)
External connection Removable type screw terminal block (M3)
Number of input points / commons 8 points / 1 common
Internal current consumption Approx. 30 mA

Signal
Terminal configuration No. Diagram of Internal circuit
name
[1] 0
[2] 1
[3] 2
[1] [4] 3
[10] [5] 4
[2] LED
[11] [6] 5
[3]
[12] [7] 6 0
[4] [8] 7
[13]
[5] [9] C Internal circuit
[14] 7
[6] [10] N.C.
[15]
[7] [11] N.C.
[16] [12] N.C.
[8] C
[17] [13] N.C.
[9]
[18] [14] N.C.
Screw for
fixing [15] N.C.
[16] N.C.
[17] N.C.
[18] C

6– 5
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(2) EH-XD16

Specification EH-XD16
Input type DC input (common use to sink and source)
Number of input points 16 points
Input voltage 24 V DC (19.2 to 30 V DC)
Input current Approx. 4.0 mA
Input impedance Approx. 5.9 kΩ
Operating ON voltage Min. 15 V
voltage OFF voltage Max. 5 V
Input response ON response Max. 5 ms
time OFF response Max. 5 ms
Insulation system Photo-coupler insulation
Input display LED display (green)
External connection Removable type screw terminal block (M3)
Number of input points / commons 16 points / 1 common (common terminal is 2 points.)
Internal current consumption Approx. 50 mA

Signal
Terminal configuration No. Diagram of Internal circuit
name
[1] 0
[2] 1
[3] 2
[1] [4] 3
[10] [5] 4
[2] LED
[11] [6] 5
[3]
[12] [7] 6 0
[4] [8] 7
[13]
[5] [9] C Internal circuit
[14] 15
[6] [10] 8
[15]
[7] [11] 9
[16] [12] 10
[8] C
[17] [13] 11
[9]
[18] [14] 12
Screw for
fixing [15] 13
[16] 14
[17] 15
[18] C

6– 6
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(3) EH-XDL16

Specification EH-XDL16
Input type DC input (common use to sink and source)
Number of input points 16 points
Input voltage 24 V DC (19.2 to 30 V DC)
Input current Approx. 4.0 mA
Input impedance Approx. 5.9 kΩ
Operating ON voltage Min. 15 V
voltage OFF voltage Max. 5 V
Input response ON response Max. 16 ms
time OFF response Max. 16 ms
Insulation system Photo-coupler insulation
Input display LED display (green)
External connection Removable type screw terminal block (M3)
Number of input points / commons 16 points / 1 common (Common terminal is 2 points.)
Internal current consumption Approx. 50 mA

Signal
Terminal configuration No. Diagram of internal circuit
name
[1] 0
[2] 1
[3] 2
[1] [4] 3
[10] [5] 4
[2] LED
[11] [6] 5
[3]
[12] [7] 6 0
[4] [8] 7
[13]
[5] [9] C Internal circuit
[14] 15
[6] [10] 8
[15]
[7] [11] 9
[16] [12] 10
[8] C
[17] [13] 11
[9]
[18] [14] 12
Screw for
fixing [15] 13
[16] 14
[17] 15
[18] C

6– 7
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(4) EH-XDS16

Specification EH-XDS16
Input type DC input (common use to sink and source)
Number of input points 16 points
Input voltage 24 V DC (19.2 to 30 V DC)
Input current Approx. 4.0 mA
Input impedance Approx. 5.9 kΩ
Operating ON voltage Min. 15 V
voltage OFF voltage Max. 5 V
Input response ON response Max. 1 ms
time OFF response Max. 1 ms
Insulation system Photo-coupler insulation
Input display LED display (green)
External connection Removable type screw terminal block (M3)
Number of input points / commons 16 points / 1 common (Common terminal is 2 points.)
Internal current consumption Approx. 50 mA

Signal
Terminal configuration No. Diagram of internal circuit
name
[1] 0
[2] 1
[3] 2
[1] [4] 3
[10] [5] 4
[2] LED
[11] [6] 5
[3]
[12] [7] 6 0
[4] [8] 7
[13]
[5] [9] C Internal circuit
[14] 15
[6] [10] 8
[15]
[7] [11] 9
[16] [12] 10
[8] C
[17] [13] 11
[9]
[18] [14] 12
Screw for
fixing [15] 13
[16] 14
[17] 15
[18] C

6– 8
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(5) EH-XDA16

Specification EH-XDA16
Input type DC input (common use to sink and source)
Number of input points 16 points
Input voltage 48 V DC (33 to 53 V DC)
Input current Approx. 4.6 mA
Input impedance Approx. 10.4 kΩ
Operating ON voltage Min. 28 V
voltage OFF voltage Max. 9 V
Input response ON response Max. 5 ms (4 ms TYP)
time OFF response Max. 5 ms (4 ms TYP)
Insulation system Photo-coupler insulation
Input display LED display (green)
External connection Removable type screw terminal block (M3)
Number of input points / commons 16 points / 1 common (common terminal is 2 points.)
Internal current consumption Approx. 50 mA

Signal
Terminal configuration No. Diagram of Internal circuit
name
[1] 0
[2] 1
[3] 2
[1] [4] 3
[10] [5] 4
[2] LED
[11] [6] 5
[3]
[12] [7] 6 0
[4] [8] 7
[13]
[5] [9] C Internal circuit
[14] 15
[6] [10] 8
[15]
[7] [11] 9
[16] [12] 10
[8] C
[17] [13] 11
[9]
[18] [14] 12
Screw for
fixing [15] 13
[16] 14
[17] 15
[18] C

6– 9
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(6) EH-XA16

Specification EH-XA16
Input type AC input
Number of input points 16 points
Input voltage 100 to 120 V AC (85 to 132 V AC)
Input current 4.8 to 7.6 mA (100 V AC / 50Hz)
Input impedance Approx. 16 kΩ (50 Hz) / Approx. 13 kΩ (60 Hz)
Operating ON voltage Min. 79 V AC
voltage OFF voltage Max. 20 V AC
Input response ON response Max. 15 ms
time OFF response Max. 25 ms
Insulation system Photo-coupler insulation
Input display LED display (green)
External connection Removable type screw terminal block (M3)
Number of input points / commons 16 points / 1 common (Common terminal is 2 points.)
Internal current consumption Approx. 50 mA

Signal
Terminal configuration No. Diagram of Internal circuit
name
[1] 0
[2] 1
[3] 2
[1] [4] 3
[10] [5] 4
[2] LED
[11] [6] 5
[3]
[12] [7] 6 0
[4] [8] 7
[13]
[5] [9] C Internal circuit
[14] 15
[6] [10] 8
[15]
[7] [11] 9
[16] [12] 10
[8] C
[17] [13] 11
[9]
[18] [14] 12
Screw for
fixing [15] 13
[16] 14
[17] 15
[18] C

6 – 10
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(7) EH-XAH16

Specification EH-XAH16
Input type AC input
Number of input points 16 points
Input voltage 200 to 240 V AC (170 to 264 V AC)
Input current 4.3 to 8.0 mA (200 V AC / 50 Hz)
Input impedance Approx. 32 kΩ (50 Hz) / Approx. 27 kΩ (60 Hz)
Operating ON voltage Min. 164 V AC
voltage OFF voltage Max. 40 V AC
Input response ON response Max. 15 ms
time OFF response Max. 25 ms
Insulation system Photo-coupler insulation
Input display LED display (green)
External connection Removable type screw terminal block (M3)
Number of input points / commons 16 points / 1 common (Common terminal is 2 points.)
Internal current consumption Approx. 50 mA

Signal
Terminal configuration No. Diagram of Internal circuit
name
[1] 0
[2] 1
[3] 2
[1] [4] 3
[10] [5] 4
[2] LED
[11] [6] 5
[3]
[12] [7] 6 0
[4] [8] 7
[13]
[5] [9] C Internal circuit
[14] 15
[6] [10] 8
[15]
[7] [11] 9
[16] [12] 10
[8] C
[17] [13] 11
[9]
[18] [14] 12
Screw for
fixing [15] 13
[16] 14
[17] 15
[18] C

6 – 11
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(8) EH-XD32

Specification EH-XD32
Input type DC input (Common use to sink and source)
Number of input points 32 points
Input voltage 24 V DC (19.2 to 30.0 V DC)
Input current Approx. 4.3 mA
Input impedance Approx. 5.6 kΩ
Operating ON voltage Min. 15 V
voltage OFF voltage Max. 5 V
Input ON response Max. 5 ms
response
time OFF response Max. 5 ms
Insulation system Photo-coupler insulation
Input display LED connector (green)
External connection Connector
Number of input points / commons 32 points / 1 common (Common terminal is 4 points.)
Internal current consumption Approx. 60 mA

Terminal Signal Signal


No. No. Diagram of Internal circuit
configuration name name
[1] 0 [21] 16
[2] 1 [22] 17
[3] 2 [23] 18
[4] 3 [24] 19
[5] 4 [25] 20
[1] [21]
[6] 5 [26] 21
[7] 6 [27] 22 LED

[8] 7 [28] 23
0
[9] C [29] C
[10] 8 [30] 24 Internal circuit
31
[11] 9 [31] 25
[12] 10 [32] 26
[13] 11 [33] 27 C
[14] 12 [34] 28
[15] 13 [35] 29
[20] [40]
[16] 14 [36] 30
[17] 15 [37] 31
[18] C [38] C
[19] N.C. [39] N.C.
[20] N.C. [40] N.C.
Applicable connectors
- A 120mm (4.73in.) space is required for the front of the module. Please choose the installing location (space) accordingly.
- Use a shield cable and always use a class D grounding.
Maker Fujitsu Solder type Socket: FCN-361J040-AU, Cover: FCN-360C040-E
Takamiz
Crimp type Housing: FCN-363J040, Contact: FCN-363J-AU
awa
Pressure-displacem FCN-367J040-AU/F
ent type
AMP Solder type 1473381-1

6 – 12
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(9) EH-XDL32

Specification EH-XDL32
Input type DC input (Common use to sink and source)
Number of input points 32 points
Input voltage 24 V DC (19.2 to 30.0 V DC)
Input current Approx. 4.3 mA
Input impedance Approx. 5.6 kΩ
Operating ON voltage Min. 15 V
voltage OFF voltage Max. 5 V
Input response ON response Max. 16 ms
time OFF response Max. 16 ms
Insulation system Photo-coupler insulation
Input display LED connector (green)
External connection Connector
Number of input points / commons 32 points / 1 common (Common terminal is 4 points.)
Internal current consumption Approx. 60 mA

Terminal Signal Signal


No. No. Diagram of Internal circuit
configuration name name
[1] 0 [21] 16
[2] 1 [22] 17
[3] 2 [23] 18
[4] 3 [24] 19
[1] [21] [5] 4 [25] 20
[6] 5 [26] 21
LED
[7] 6 [27] 22
[8] 7 [28] 23
0
[9] C [29] C
[10] 8 [30] 24 Internal circuit
31
[11] 9 [31] 25
[12] 10 [32] 26
[13] 11 [33] 27 C
[14] 12 [34] 28
[15] 13 [35] 29
[20] [40]
[16] 14 [36] 30
[17] 15 [37] 31
[18] C [38] C
[19] N.C. [39] N.C.
[20] N.C. [40] N.C.
Applicable connectors
- A 120 mm (4.73 in.) space is required for the front of the module. Please choose the installing location (space) accordingly.
- Use a shield cable and always use a class D grounding.
Maker Fujitsu Solder type Socket: FCN-361J040-AU, Cover: FCN-360C040-E
Takamizawa
Crimp type Housing: FCN-363J040, Contact: FCN-363J-AU
Pressure-displacement FCN-367J040-AU/F
type
AMP Solder type 1473381-1

6 – 13
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(10) EH-XDS32

Specification EH-XDS32
Input type DC input (Common use to sink and source)
Number of input points 32 points
Input voltage 24 V DC (19.2 to 30.0 V DC)
Input current Approx. 4.3 mA
Input impedance Approx. 5.6 kΩ
Operating ON voltage Min. 15 V
voltage OFF voltage Max. 5 V
Input response ON response Max. 1 ms
time OFF response Max. 1 ms
Insulation system Photo-coupler insulation
Input display LED connector (green)
External connection Connector
Number of input points / commons 32 points / 1 common (Common terminal is 4 points.)
Internal current consumption Approx. 60 mA

Terminal Signal Signal


No. No. Diagram of Internal circuit
configuration name name
[1] 0 [21] 16
[2] 1 [22] 17
[3] 2 [23] 18
[4] 3 [24] 19
[1] [21] [5] 4 [25] 20
[6] 5 [26] 21
LED
[7] 6 [27] 22
[8] 7 [28] 23
0
[9] C [29] C
[10] 8 [30] 24 Internal circuit
31
[11] 9 [31] 25
[12] 10 [32] 26
[13] 11 [33] 27 C
[14] 12 [34] 28
[15] 13 [35] 29
[20] [40]
[16] 14 [36] 30
[17] 15 [37] 31
[18] C [38] C
[19] N.C. [39] N.C.
[20] N.C. [40] N.C.
Applicable connectors
- A 120mm (4.73in.) space is required for the front of the module. Please choose the installing location (space) accordingly.
- Use a shield cable and always use a class D grounding.
Maker Fujitsu Solder type Socket: FCN-361J040-AU, Cover: FCN-360C040-E
Takamizawa
Crimp type Housing: FCN-363J040, Contact: FCN-363J-AU
Pressure-displacement FCN-367J040-AU/F
type
AMP Solder type 1473381-1

6 – 14
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(11) EH-XD32E

Specification EH-XD32E
Input type DC input (Common use to sink and source)
Number of input points 32 points
Input voltage 24 V DC (19.2 to 30.0 V DC)
Input current Approx. 4.3 mA
Input impedance Approx. 5.6 kΩ
Operating ON voltage Min. 15 V
voltage OFF voltage Max. 5 V
Input response ON response Max. 1 ms
time OFF response Max. 1 ms
Insulation system Photo-coupler insulation
Input display LED display (green)
External connection Spring type terminal block (removable type)
Number of input points / commons 8 points / 1 common (Common terminal is 2 points each. 4 system common is independent.)
Internal current consumption Approx. 60 mA

Terminal Signal Signal


No. No. Diagram of Internal circuit
configuration name name
[1] 0 [21] 16
[2] 1 [22] 17
[3] 2 [23] 18
[1] [21] [4] 3 [24] 19
[5] 4 [25] 20
[6] 5 [26] 21
LED
[7] 6 [27] 22
[8] 7 [28] 23
0
[9] C1 [29] C3
[10] [30] [10] C1 [30] C3 Internal circuit
7
[11] [31]
[11] 8 [31] 24
[12] 9 [32] 25
[13] 10 [33] 26 C1
[14] 11 [34] 27
[15] 12 [35] 28
[20] [40]
[16] 13 [36] 29
[17] 14 [37] 30
[18] 15 [38] 31
[19] C2 [39] C4
[20] C2 [40] C4
Applicable connectors Applicable cable
Manufacturer: Weidmuller 0.5 mm2 - 1.0 mm2 (shared at a twisted pair cable and a single core cable)
Type: B2L3.5/20AUOR AWG 28 - 18
Product No.: 175736 A crimp terminal cannot be used.

6 – 15
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(12) EH-XDL32E

Specification EH-XDL32E
Input type DC input (Common use to sink and source)
Number of input points 32 points
Input voltage 24 V DC (19.2 to 30 V DC)
Input current Approx. 4.3 mA
Input impedance Approx. 5.6 kΩ
Operating ON voltage Min. 15 V
voltage OFF voltage Max. 5 V
Input response ON response Max. 16 ms
time OFF response Max. 16 ms
Insulation system Photo-coupler insulation
Input display LED display (green)
External connection Spring type terminal block (removable type)
Number of input points / commons 8 points / 1 common (Common terminal is 2 points each. 4 system common is independent.)
Internal current consumption Approx. 60 mA

Terminal Signal Signal


No. No. Diagram of Internal circuit
configuration name name
[1] 0 [21] 16
[2] 1 [22] 17
[3] 2 [23] 18
[1] [21] [4] 3 [24] 19
[5] 4 [25] 20
[6] 5 [26] 21
LED
[7] 6 [27] 22
[8] 7 [28] 23
0
[9] C1 [29] C3
[10] [30] [10] C1 [30] C3 Internal circuit
7
[11] [31]
[11] 8 [31] 24
[12] 9 [32] 25
[13] 10 [33] 26 C1
[14] 11 [34] 27
[15] 12 [35] 28
[20] [40]
[16] 13 [36] 29
[17] 14 [37] 30
[18] 15 [38] 31
[19] C2 [39] C4
[20] C2 [40] C4
Applicable connectors Applicable cable
Manufacturer: Weidmuller 0.5 mm2 - 1.0 mm2 (Shared at a twisted pair cable and a single core cable.)
Type: B2L3.5/20AUOR AWG 28 - 18
Product No.175736 A crimp terminal cannot be used.

6 – 16
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(13) EH-XD32H

Item EH-XD32H PIM-DM, PIH-DM (for replacing)


Series HX / EH-150 EM / EM-Ⅱ, H-200 / 250 / 252B / 252C
Input specification DC input (Common use to source)
Number of input points 32 points
Input voltage 24 V DC (21.6 to 26.0 V DC)
Input current (24V DC) Approx. 4.1 mA Approx. 4.7 mA
Input impedance Approx. 5.9 kΩ Approx. 5.1 kΩ
Operating ON voltage Min. 19 V
voltage OFF voltage Max. 7 V
Input ON response Max. 4 ms
response
time OFF response Max. 4 ms
Insulation system Photo-coupler insulation
Number of input points /
32 points / 1 common (common terminal is 4 *1)
commons
Input display LED (green) *2 LED (red)
polarity Common terminal (+)
External connection Connector (50 pins)
Internal current consumption Approx. 60 mA Approx. 20 mA
*1 Common terminals are connected internally.
*2 There are 16 points for each LED display. The displayed group is toggled using a switch.

Specification of external wiring connector


Wire
Product name Manufacturer Product No. Connection method

DX30-50P AWG#30
Untie crimping
DX30A-50P AWG#28

Plug connector DX31-50P AWG#30


Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. Crimping
DX31A-50P AWG#28

DX40-50P Soldering -

Die cast cover DX-50-CV1 - -

6 – 17
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

Terminal Signal Signal


No. No. Diagram of Internal circuit
configuration name name
[25] NC [50] NC
[24] NC [49] NC EH - XD32H (This product)
[23] NC [48] NC
25 50
[22] NC [47] NC
0
[21] 15 [46] 31
[20] 14 [45] 30 Internal
31
[19] 13 [44] 29 circuit
[18] 12 [43] 28
+ C
[17] 11 [42] 27
[16] 10 [41] 26
[15] 9 [40] 25
[14] 8 [39] 24
[13] NC [38] NC
1 26 PIM-DM, PIH-DM (for replacing) [Reference]
[12] C [37] C
[11] NC [36] NC
[10] 7 [35] 23 0
[9] 6 [34] 22 Internal
31 circuit
[8] 5 [33] 21
Please note it in [7] 4 [32] 20
C
+
the direction of [6] 3 [31] 19
[5] 2 [30] 18
the connector*1
[4] 1 [29] 17
[3] 0 [28] 16
[2] NC [27] NC
[1] C [26] C

*1 EH-XD32H has a turned connector to a 32-point I/O module for EM / H-200 series. Connect an external wiring cable

rotating 180 degrees around when replacing the module. (You cannot connect the cable in wrong direction due to the

structure for avoiding improper connection.)


EM / H-200 series HX series

0 4 8 12 Reverse connector Replacement


1 5 9 13
2 6 10 14
3 7 11 15
HITACHI

16 20 24 28
11 21 25 29
18 22 26 30
19 23 27 31

26 1

50 25
Rotate 180 degrees
around to connect

6 – 18
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(14) EH-XDB32

Specification EH-XDB32
Input type DC input (Common use to sink and source)
Number of input points 32 points
Input voltage 12 V DC (9.6 to 14.4 V DC)
Input current Approx. 9 mA
Input impedance Approx. 1.2 kΩ
Operating ON voltage Min. 6.4 V
voltage OFF voltage Max. 2 V
Input ON response Max. 5 ms
response
time OFF response Max. 5 ms
Insulation system Photo-coupler insulation
Input display LED connector (green)
External connection Connector
Number of input points / commons 32 points / 1 common (Common terminal is 4 points.)
Internal current consumption Approx. 60 mA

Terminal Signal Signal


No. No. Diagram of Internal circuit
configuration name name
[1] 0 [21] 16
[2] 1 [22] 17
[3] 2 [23] 18
[4] 3 [24] 19
[5] 4 [25] 20
[1] [21]
[6] 5 [26] 21
[7] 6 [27] 22 LED

[8] 7 [28] 23
0
[9] C [29] C
[10] 8 [30] 24 Internal circuit
31
[11] 9 [31] 25
[12] 10 [32] 26
[13] 11 [33] 27 C
[14] 12 [34] 28
[15] 13 [35] 29
[20] [40]
[16] 14 [36] 30
[17] 15 [37] 31
[18] C [38] C
[19] N.C. [39] N.C.
[20] N.C. [40] N.C.
Applicable connectors
- A 120mm (4.73in.) space is required for the front of the module. Please choose the installing location (space) accordingly.
- Use a shield cable and always use a class D grounding.
Maker Fujitsu Solder type Socket: FCN-361J040-AU, Cover: FCN-360C040-E
Takamiz
Crimp type Housing: FCN-363J040, Contact: FCN-363J-AU
awa
Pressure-displacem FCN-367J040-AU/F
ent type
AMP Solder type 1473381-1

6 – 19
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(15) EH-XDBL32

Specification EH-XDBL32
Input type DC input (Common use to sink and source)
Number of input points 32 points
Input voltage 12 V DC (9.6 to 14.4 V DC)
Input current Approx. 9 mA
Input impedance Approx. 1.2 kΩ
Operating ON voltage Min. 6.4 V
voltage OFF voltage Max. 2 V
Input response ON response Max. 16 ms
time OFF response Max. 16 ms
Insulation system Photo-coupler insulation
Input display LED connector (green)
External connection Connector
Number of input points / commons 32 points / 1 common (Common terminal is 4 points.)
Internal current consumption Approx. 60 mA

Terminal Signal Signal


No. No. Diagram of Internal circuit
configuration name name
[1] 0 [21] 16
[2] 1 [22] 17
[3] 2 [23] 18
[4] 3 [24] 19
[1] [21] [5] 4 [25] 20
[6] 5 [26] 21
LED
[7] 6 [27] 22
[8] 7 [28] 23
0
[9] C [29] C
[10] 8 [30] 24 Internal circuit
31
[11] 9 [31] 25
[12] 10 [32] 26
[13] 11 [33] 27 C
[14] 12 [34] 28
[15] 13 [35] 29
[20] [40]
[16] 14 [36] 30
[17] 15 [37] 31
[18] C [38] C
[19] N.C. [39] N.C.
[20] N.C. [40] N.C.
Applicable connectors
- A 120 mm (4.73 in.) space is required for the front of the module. Please choose the installing location (space) accordingly.
- Use a shield cable and always use a class D grounding.
Maker Fujitsu Solder type Socket: FCN-361J040-AU, Cover: FCN-360C040-E
Takamizawa
Crimp type Housing: FCN-363J040, Contact: FCN-363J-AU
Pressure-displacement FCN-367J040-AU/F
type
AMP Solder type 1473381-1

6 – 20
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(16) EH-XTT32

Specification EH-XTT32 Reference: XTT05BH


Input type DC input (TTL level input, sink type)
Number of input points 32 points
Input voltage 3 to 15 V DC
Input current Approx. 5 mA (5 V) *1 Approx. 6 mA (5 V)
Input impedance Approx. 1 kΩ (5 V) Approx. 820 Ω
5 V external power supply: Max. 1.5 V
ON voltage
Operating 15 V external power supply: Max. 4.5 V
voltage 5 V external power supply: Min. 3.5 V
OFF voltage
15 V external power supply: Min. 11 V
Input ON response Max. 1 ms
response time OFF response Max. 1 ms
Insulation system Photo-coupler insulation
Input display Led display (green) Led display (red)
External connection Connector Removable type screw terminal block (M3)
Number of input points / commons 16 (2 commons, 4 terminals)
Fuse 0.63 A *2 -
External power supply capacity 0.12 A (5 V) 0.35 A (5 V)
(terminal S) 0.2 A (15 V) 0.9 A (15 V)
Internal current consumption Max. 80 mA Max. 150 mA
*1 Please note that the input current slightly decays.
*2 If the fuse would blow, the module needs to be repaired. The fuse cannot be replaced.

Terminal Signal Signal


No. No. Diagram of Internal circuit
configuration *3 name name
[1] 0 [21] 16 EH-CBM**(W)
[2] 1 [22] 17
S0
[3] 2 [23] 18 Internal
0
circuit
[4] 3 [24] 19 +

15
[5] 4 [25] 20

[1] [21] [6] 5 [26] 21 ~
COM0
S1
[7] 6 [27] 22
16
[8] 7 [28] 23 +

[9] COM0 [29] COM1 31

[10] S0 [30] S1 +

COM1
[11] 8 [31] 24
[12] 9 [32] 25
Derating diagram (EH -X TT32)
[13] 10 [33] 26 32 10 V DC

[14] 11 [34] 27
Num berof Sim ultaneous

[15] 12 [35] 28 20 12 V DC
[20] [40]
ON input

16
[16] 13 [36] 29 12
15 V DC
[17] 14 [37] 30 8

[18] 15 [38] 31 0
0 10 20 30 40 50
[19] COM0 [39] COM1 Ambient temperature ( °C)
[20] S0 [40] S1
Compatible connector
Please make sure to secure 120 mm space on the front of the module.
Please use a shield cable and always use a class D grounding.
Vender Fujitsu Solder Pin type Socket: FCN-361J040-AU, Cover: FCN-360C040-E
Crimp type Housing: FCN-363J040, Contact: FCN-363J-AU, Cover: FCN-360C040-E
IDC type Jack: FCN-367J040-AU/F
AMP Solder Pin type Connector: 1473381-1
*3 Please note that the signal arrangement is different from other 32-point input modules like EH-XD32 because there are S
terminals.

6 – 21
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(17) EH-XD64

Specification EH-XD64
Input type DC input (Common used to sink and source)
Number of input points 64 points
Input voltage 24 V DC (19.2 to 30.0 V DC)
Input current Approx. 4.3 mA
Input impedance Approx. 5.6 kΩ
Operating ON voltage Min. 15 V
voltage OFF voltage Max. 5 V
Input response ON response Max. 1 ms
time OFF response Max. 1 ms
Insulation system Photo-coupler insulation
Input display LED display (green)*1
External connection Connector
32 points / 1 common
Number of input points / commons
(Common terminal is 4 points each. 2 system common is independent.*2)
Internal current consumption Approx. 80 mA
*1 There are 16 points of LED indication. The indication group is switched by toggle switch.
*2 2 groups(C1,C2) are separated. 4 common terminals in one group are connected internally.

Signal Signal Signal Signal


Terminal configuration No. No. No. No. Diagram of Internal circuit
name name name name

[41] 32 [61] 48 [1] 0 [21] 16


C C [42] 33 [62] 49 [2] 1 [22] 17
N N
2 1 [43] 34 [63] 50 [3] 2 [23] 18 LED

[61] [21] [44] 35 [64] 51 [4] 3 [24] 19 0

[41] [1] [45] 36 [65] 52 [5] 4 [25] 20 Internal circuit


7
[46] 37 [66] 53 [6] 5 [26] 21
[47] 38 [67] 54 [7] 6 [27] 22 C1
[48] 39 [68] 55 [8] 7 [28] 23
[49] C2 [69] C2 [9] C1 [29] C1
[50] 40 [70] 56 [10] 8 [30] 24
[51] 41 [71] 57 [11] 9 [31] 25 Derating diagram

[52] 42 [72] 58 [12] 10 [32] 26 100

[53] 43 [73] 59 [13] 11 [33] 27 80

[54] 44 [74] 60 [14] 12 [34] 28 24V DC


ON rate (%)

60

[80] [40]
[55] 45 [75] 61 [15] 13 [35] 29 26.4V DC
40 28.8V DC
[60] [20] [56] 46 [76] 62 [16] 14 [36] 30
[57] 47 [77] 63 [17] 15 [37] 31 20
0 10 20 30 40 50

[58] C2 [78] C2 [18] C1 [38] C1 Ambient temperature (ºC)

[59] N.C. [79] N.C. [19] N.C. [39] N.C.


[60] N.C. [80] N.C. [20] N.C. [40] N.C.
Applicable connectors
- A 120 mm (4.73 in.) space is required for the front of the module. Please choose the installing location (space) accordingly.
- Use a shield cable and always use a class D grounding.
Manufacturer Fujitsu Solder type Socket: FCN-361J040-AU, Cover: FCN-360C040-E
Takamizawa
Crimp type Housing: FCN-363J040, Contact: FCN-363J-AU

Pressure-displacement FCN-367J040-AU/F
type
AMP Solder type 1473381-1

6 – 22
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(18) EH-XDL64

Specification EH-XDL64
Input type DC input (Common used to sink and source)
Number of input points 64 points
Input voltage 24 V DC (19.2 to 30.0 V DC)
Input current Approx. 4.3 mA
Input impedance Approx. 5.6 kΩ
Operating ON voltage Min. 15 V
voltage OFF voltage Max. 5 V
Input response ON response Max. 16 ms
time OFF response Max. 16 ms
Insulation system Photo-coupler insulation
Input display LED display (green)*1
External connection Connector
32 points / 1 common
Number of input points / commons
(Common terminal is 4 points each. 2 system common is independent.*2)
Internal current consumption Approx. 80 mA
*1 There are 16 points of LED indication. The indication group is switched by toggle switch.
*2 2 groups(C1,C2) are separated. 4 common terminals in one group are connected internally.

Signal Signal Signal Signal


Terminal configuration No. No. No. No. Diagram of Internal circuit
name name name name

[41] 32 [61] 48 [1] 0 [21] 16


C C [42] 33 [62] 49 [2] 1 [22] 17
N N
2 1 [43] 34 [63] 50 [3] 2 [23] 18 LED

[61] [21] [44] 35 [64] 51 [4] 3 [24] 19 0

[41] [1] [45] 36 [65] 52 [5] 4 [25] 20 Internal circuit


7
[46] 37 [66] 53 [6] 5 [26] 21
[47] 38 [67] 54 [7] 6 [27] 22 C1
[48] 39 [68] 55 [8] 7 [28] 23
[49] C2 [69] C2 [9] C1 [29] C1
[50] 40 [70] 56 [10] 8 [30] 24
[51] 41 [71] 57 [11] 9 [31] 25 Derating diagram

[52] 42 [72] 58 [12] 10 [32] 26 100

[53] 43 [73] 59 [13] 11 [33] 27 80

[54] 44 [74] 60 [14] 12 [34] 28 24V DC


ON rate (%)

60

[80] [40]
[55] 45 [75] 61 [15] 13 [35] 29 26.4V DC
40 28.8V DC
[60] [20] [56] 46 [76] 62 [16] 14 [36] 30
[57] 47 [77] 63 [17] 15 [37] 31 20
0 10 20 30 40 50

[58] C2 [78] C2 [18] C1 [38] C1 Ambient temperature (ºC)

[59] N.C. [79] N.C. [19] N.C. [39] N.C.


[60] N.C. [80] N.C. [20] N.C. [40] N.C.
Applicable connectors
- A 120 mm (4.73 in.) space is required for the front of the module. Please choose the installing location (space) accordingly.
- Use a shield cable and always use a class D grounding.
Manufacturer Fujitsu Solder type Socket: FCN-361J040-AU, Cover: FCN-360C040-E
Takamizawa
Crimp type Housing: FCN-363J040, Contact: FCN-363J-AU

Pressure-displacement FCN-367J040-AU/F
type
AMP Solder type 1473381-1

6 – 23
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(19) EH-XDB64

Specification EH-XDB64
Input type DC input (Common used to sink and source)
Number of input points 64 points
Input voltage 12 V DC (9.6 to 14.4 V DC)
Input current Approx. 9 mA
Input impedance Approx. 1.2 kΩ
Operating ON voltage Min. 6.4 V
voltage OFF voltage Max. 2 V
Input response ON response Max. 1 ms
time OFF response Max. 1 ms
Insulation system Photo-coupler insulation
Input display LED display (green)*1
External connection Connector
32 points / 1 common
Number of input points / commons
(Common terminal is 4 points each. 2 system common is independent.*2)
Internal current consumption Approx. 80 mA
*1 There are 16 points of LED indication. The indication group is switched by toggle switch.
*2 2 groups(C1,C2) are separated. 4 common terminals in one group are connected internally.

Signal Signal Signal Signal


Terminal configuration No. No. No. No. Diagram of Internal circuit
name name name name

[41] 32 [61] 48 [1] 0 [21] 16


C C [42] 33 [62] 49 [2] 1 [22] 17
N N
2 1 [43] 34 [63] 50 [3] 2 [23] 18 LED

[61] [21] [44] 35 [64] 51 [4] 3 [24] 19 0

[41] [1] [45] 36 [65] 52 [5] 4 [25] 20 Internal circuit


7
[46] 37 [66] 53 [6] 5 [26] 21
[47] 38 [67] 54 [7] 6 [27] 22 C1
[48] 39 [68] 55 [8] 7 [28] 23
[49] C2 [69] C2 [9] C1 [29] C1
[50] 40 [70] 56 [10] 8 [30] 24
[51] 41 [71] 57 [11] 9 [31] 25 Derating diagram

[52] 42 [72] 58 [12] 10 [32] 26 100

[53] 43 [73] 59 [13] 11 [33] 27 80

[54] 44 [74] 60 [14] 12 [34] 28 24V DC


ON rate (%)

60

[80] [40]
[55] 45 [75] 61 [15] 13 [35] 29 26.4V DC
40 28.8V DC
[60] [20] [56] 46 [76] 62 [16] 14 [36] 30
[57] 47 [77] 63 [17] 15 [37] 31 20
0 10 20 30 40 50

[58] C2 [78] C2 [18] C1 [38] C1 Ambient temperature (ºC)

[59] N.C. [79] N.C. [19] N.C. [39] N.C.


[60] N.C. [80] N.C. [20] N.C. [40] N.C.
Applicable connectors
- A 120 mm (4.73 in.) space is required for the front of the module. Please choose the installing location (space) accordingly.
- Use a shield cable and always use a class D grounding.
Manufacturer Fujitsu Solder type Socket: FCN-361J040-AU, Cover: FCN-360C040-E
Takamizawa
Crimp type Housing: FCN-363J040, Contact: FCN-363J-AU

Pressure-displacement FCN-367J040-AU/F
type
AMP Solder type 1473381-1

6 – 24
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(20) EH-XDBL64

Specification EH-XDBL64
Input type DC input (Common used to sink and source)
Number of input points 64 points
Input voltage 12 V DC (9.6 to 14.4 V DC)
Input current Approx. 9 mA
Input impedance Approx. 1.2 kΩ
Operating ON voltage Min. 6.4 V
voltage OFF voltage Max. 2 V
Input response ON response Max. 16 ms
time OFF response Max. 16 ms
Insulation system Photo-coupler insulation
Input display LED display (green)*1
External connection Connector
32 points / 1 common
Number of input points / commons
(Common terminal is 4 points each. 2 system common is independent.*2)
Internal current consumption Approx. 80 mA
*1 There are 16 points of LED indication. The indication group is switched by toggle switch.
*2 2 groups(C1,C2) are separated. 4 common terminals in one group are connected internally.

Signal Signal Signal Signal


Terminal configuration No. No. No. No. Diagram of Internal circuit
name name name name

[41] 32 [61] 48 [1] 0 [21] 16


C C [42] 33 [62] 49 [2] 1 [22] 17
N N
2 1 [43] 34 [63] 50 [3] 2 [23] 18 LED

[61] [21] [44] 35 [64] 51 [4] 3 [24] 19 0

[41] [1] [45] 36 [65] 52 [5] 4 [25] 20 Internal circuit


7
[46] 37 [66] 53 [6] 5 [26] 21
[47] 38 [67] 54 [7] 6 [27] 22 C1
[48] 39 [68] 55 [8] 7 [28] 23
[49] C2 [69] C2 [9] C1 [29] C1
[50] 40 [70] 56 [10] 8 [30] 24
[51] 41 [71] 57 [11] 9 [31] 25 Derating diagram

[52] 42 [72] 58 [12] 10 [32] 26 100

[53] 43 [73] 59 [13] 11 [33] 27 80

[54] 44 [74] 60 [14] 12 [34] 28 24V DC


ON rate (%)

60

[80] [40]
[55] 45 [75] 61 [15] 13 [35] 29 26.4V DC
40 28.8V DC
[60] [20] [56] 46 [76] 62 [16] 14 [36] 30
[57] 47 [77] 63 [17] 15 [37] 31 20
0 10 20 30 40 50

[58] C2 [78] C2 [18] C1 [38] C1 Ambient temperature (ºC)

[59] N.C. [79] N.C. [19] N.C. [39] N.C.


[60] N.C. [80] N.C. [20] N.C. [40] N.C.
Applicable connectors
- A 120 mm (4.73 in.) space is required for the front of the module. Please choose the installing location (space) accordingly.
- Use a shield cable and always use a class D grounding.
Manufacturer Fujitsu Solder type Socket: FCN-361J040-AU, Cover: FCN-360C040-E
Takamizawa
Crimp type Housing: FCN-363J040, Contact: FCN-363J-AU

Pressure-displacement FCN-367J040-AU/F
type
AMP Solder type 1473381-1

6 – 25
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(21) EH-YT8

Specification EH-YT8
Output specification Transistor output (sink type)
Number of output points 8 points
Rated load voltage 12 / 24 V DC (+10 %, -15 %)
Minimum switching current 1 mA
Leak current 0.1 mA
Maximum load 1 circuit 0.5 A(0.3 A MFG NO.02F** or before)*1
current 1 common 2.4 A
Output OFFON Max. 0.3 ms
response time ONOFF Max. 1 ms
Insulation system Photo-coupler insulation
Output display LED display (green)
External connection Removable type screw terminal block (M3)
Number of output points / commons 8 points / 1 common
Surge removal circuit Diode
Fuse*2 4 A / 1 common
External power supply (for supplying
12 / 24 V DC (+10 %, -15 %) (30 mA at the maximum)
power to S-terminal)
Internal current consumption Approx. 30 mA
Short-circuit protection function None
*1 MFG NO. (02F**) indicates products of June 2002.
*2 The module needs to be repaired in case the short-circuited load causes the fuse to blown out.
But, users cannot replace the fuse.

Signal
Terminal configuration No. Diagram of Internal circuit
name
[1] 0
[2] 1
[3] 2
[1] [4] 3
[10]
[2] [5] 4
[11] S
[3]
[6] 5 LED
[12] [7] 6
[4] 0
[13] [8] 7
[5] [9] C Internal
[14] circuit 7
[6] [10] N.C.
[15]
[7] [11] N.C.
[16] [12] N.C. C
[8]
[17] [13] N.C.
[9] [14] N.C.
Screw for [18]
[15] N.C.
fixing
[16] N.C.
[17] N.C.
[18] S

6 – 26
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(22) EH-YT16

Specification EH-YT16
Output specification Transistor output (sink type)
Number of output prints 16 points
Rated load voltage 12 / 24 V DC (+10 %, -15 %)
Minimum switching current 1 mA
Leak current 0.1 mA
Maximum load 1 circuit 0.5 A(0.3 A MFG NO.02F** or before)*1
current 1 common 4A
Output OFFON Max. 0.3 ms
response time ONOFF Max. 1 ms
Insulation system Photo-coupler insulation
Output display LED display (green)
External connection Removable type screw terminal block (M3)
Number of output points / commons 16 points / 1 common
Surge removal circuit Diode
Fuse*2 8 A / 1 common
External power supply (for supplying
12 / 24 V DC (+10 %, -15 %) (30 mA at the maximum)
power to S-terminal)
Internal current consumption Approx. 50 mA
Short-circuit protection function None
*1 MFG NO. (02F**) indicates products of June 2002.
*2 The module needs to be repaired in case the short-circuited load causes the fuse to blown out.
But, users cannot replace the fuse.

Signal
Terminal configuration No. Diagram of Internal circuit
name
[1] 0
[2] 1
[3] 2
[1] [4] 3
[10]
[2] [5] 4
[11] S
[3]
[6] 5 LED
[12] [7] 6
[4] 0
[13] [8] 7
[5] [9] C Internal
[14] circuit 15
[6] [10] 8
[15]
[7] [11] 9
[16] [12] 10 C
[8]
[17] [13] 11
[9] [14] 12
Screw for [18]
[15] 13
fixing
[16] 14
[17] 15
[18] S

6 – 27
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(23) EH-YTA16

Specification EH-YTA16
Output specification Transistor output (sink type)
Number of output prints 16 points
Rated load voltage 24 / 48 V DC (21 to 53 V DC)
Minimum switching current 1 mA
Leak current 0.1 mA
Maximum load 1 circuit 2A
current 1 common Max. 5 A
Output OFFON Max. 0.3 ms
response time ONOFF Max. 1 ms
Insulation system Photo-coupler insulation
Output display LED display (green)
External connection Removable type screw terminal block (M3)
Number of output points / commons 16 points / 1 common
Surge removal circuit Diode
Fuse *1 8 A / 1 common
External power supply *2
48 V DC (21 to 53 V DC) (30 mA at the maximum) *3
(for supplying power to S-terminal)
Internal current consumption Approx. 50 mA
Short-circuit protection function None
*1 The module needs to be repaired in case the short-circuited load causes the fuse to blown out.
But, users cannot replace the fuse.
*2 It’s necessary to supply rated load voltage from outside to the S-terminal.
*3 This value is internal current consumption of the module. Additional current is necessary to drive other devices.

Signal
Terminal configuration No. Diagram of Internal circuit
name
[1] 0
[2] 1
[3] 2
[1] [4] 3
[10]
[2] [5] 4
[11] S
[3]
[6] 5 LED
[12] [7] 6
[4] 0
[13] [8] 7
[5] [9] C Internal
[14] circuit 15
[6] [10] 8
[15]
[7] [11] 9
[16] [12] 10 C
[8]
[17] [13] 11
[9] [14] 12
Screw for [18]
[15] 13
fixing
[16] 14
[17] 15
[18] S

6 – 28
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(24) EH-YTP8

Specification EH-YTP8
Output specification Transistor output (source type)
Number of output points 8 points
Rated load voltage 12 / 24 V DC (+10 %, -15 %)
Minimum switching current 1 mA
Leak current 0.1 mA
Maximum load 1 circuit 0.5 A(0.3 A MFG NO.02F** or before)*1
current 1 common 2.4 A
Output OFFON Max. 0.3 ms
response time ONOFF Max. 1 ms
Insulation system Photo-coupler insulation
Output display LED display (green)
External connection Removal type screw terminal block (M3)
Number of output points / commons 8 points / 1 common
Surge removal circuit Diode
Fuse*2 4 A / 1 common
External power supply (for supplying
12 / 24 V DC (+10 %, -15 %) (30 mA at the maximum)
power to S-terminal)
Internal current consumption Approx. 30 mA
Short-circuit protection function None
*1 MFG NO. (02F**) indicates products of June 2002.
*2 The module needs to be repaired in case the short-circuited load causes the fuse to blown-out.
But, users cannot replace the fuse.

Signal
Terminal configuration No. Diagram of Internal circuit
name
[1] 0
[2] 1
[3] 2
[1] [4] 3
[10] LED
[2] [5] 4
[11]
C
[3]
[6] 5
[12] [7] 6
[4]
[13] [8] 7 Internal
[5] [9] C circuit 0
[14]
[6] [10] N.C.
[15] 7
[7] [11] N.C.
[16] [12] N.C.
[8] S
[17] [13] N.C.
[9] [14] N.C.
Screw for [18]
[15] N.C.
fixing
[16] N.C.
[17] N.C.
[18] S

6 – 29
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(25) EH-YTP16

Specification EH-YTP16
Output specification Transistor output (source type)
Number of output points 16 points
Rated load voltage 12 / 24 V DC (+10 %, -15 %)
Minimum switching current 1 mA
Leak current 0.1 mA
Maximum load 1 circuit 0.5 A (0.3 A MFG NO.02F** or before*1)
current 1 common 4A
Output OFFON Max. 0.3 ms
response time ONOFF Max. 1 ms
Insulation system Photo-coupler insulation
Output display LED display (green)
External connection Removable type screw terminal block (M3)
Number of output points / commons 16 points / 1 common
Surge removal circuit Diode
Fuse*2 8 A / 1 common
External power supply (for supplying
12 / 24 V DC (+10 %, -15 %) (30 mA at the maximum)
power to S-terminal)
Internal current consumption Approx. 50 mA
Short-circuit protection function None
*1 MFG NO. (02F**) indicates products of June 2002.
*2 The module needs to be repaired in case the short-circuited load causes the fuse to blown out.
But, users cannot replace the fuse.

Signal
Terminal configuration No. Diagram of Internal circuit
name
[1] 0
[2] 1
[3] 2
[1] [4] 3
[10] LED
[2] [5] 4
[11]
C
[3]
[6] 5
[12] [7] 6
[4]
[13] [8] 7 Internal
[5] [9] C circuit 0
[14]
[6] [10] 8
[15] 15
[7] [11] 9
[16] [12] 10
[8] S
[17] [13] 11
[9] [14] 12
Screw for [18]
fixing
[15] 13
[16] 14
[17] 15
[18] S

6 – 30
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(26) EH-YTPA16

Specification EH-YTPA16
Output specification Transistor output (source type)
Number of output points 16 points
Rated load voltage 24 / 48 V DC (21 to 53 V DC)
Minimum switching current 1 mA
Leak current 0.1 mA
1 A (No. 0 to 9)
Maximum load 1 circuit
2A (No. 10 to 15)
current
1 common 5A
Output OFFON Max. 0.3 ms
response time ONOFF Max. 1 ms
Insulation system Photo-coupler insulation
Output display LED display (green)
External connection Removable type screw terminal block (M3)
Number of output points / commons 16 points / 1 common
Surge removal circuit Diode
Fuse*2 8 A / 1 common
External power supply *2
48 V DC (21 to 53 V DC) (30 mA at the maximum) *3
(for supplying power to S-terminal)
Internal current consumption Approx. 50 mA
Short-circuit protection function None
*1 The module needs to be repaired in case the short-circuited load causes the fuse to blown out.
But, users cannot replace the fuse.
*2 It’s necessary to supply rated load voltage from outside to the S-terminal.
*3 This value is internal current consumption of the module. Additional current is necessary to drive other devices.

Signal
Terminal configuration No. Diagram of Internal circuit
name
[1] 0
[2] 1
[3] 2
[1] [4] 3
[10]
[2] [5] 4 LED
[11] C
[3]
[6] 5
[12] [7] 6
[4]
[13] [8] 7 Internal
[5] [9] C circuit 0
[14]
[6] [10] 8
[15] 15
[7] [11] 9
[16] [12] 10
[8] S
[17] [13] 11
[9] [14] 12
Screw for [18]
fixing
[15] 13
[16] 14
[17] 15
[18] S

6 – 31
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(27) EH-YTP16S

Specification EH-YTP16S
Output specification Transistor output (source type)
Number of output points 16 points
Raged load voltage 12 / 24 V DC (+10 %, -15 %)
Minimum switching current 1 mA
Leak current 0.1 mA
Maximum load 1 circuit 0.8 A
current 1 common 5A
Output OFFON Max. 0.3 ms
response time ONOFF Max. 1 ms
Insulation system Photo-coupler insulation
Output display LED display (green)
External connection Removable type screw terminal block (M3)
Number of output points / commons 16 points / 1 common
Surge removal circuit Built-in
Fuse None
External power supply
12 / 24 V DC (+10 %, -15 %) (30 mA at the maximum)
(for supplying power to S-terminal)
Internal current consumption Approx. 50 mA
Short-circuit protection function Available

Signal
Terminal configuration No. Diagram of Internal circuit
name
[1] 0
[2] 1
[3] 2
[1] [4] 3
[10]
[2] [5] 4 LED
[11] C
[3]
[6] 5
[12] [7] 6
[4]
[13] [8] 7 Internal
[5] [9] C circuit
[14]
[6] [10] 8 0
[15]
[7] [11] 9
15
[16] [12] 10
[8]
[17] [13] 11 S
[9] [14] 12
Screw for [18]
fixing
[15] 13
[16] 14
[17] 15
[18] S

6 – 32
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(28) EH-YR8B

Specification EH-YR8B
Output specification Relay output
Number of output points 8 points
Rated load voltage 100 / 240 V AC , 24 V DC
Minimum switching current 1 mA(5 V DC), except after a great current switching
Leak current None
Maximum load 1 circuit 2A
current 1 common 2A
Output OFFON Max. 10 ms
response time ONOFF Max. 10 ms
Insulation system Relay insulation
Output display LED display (green)
External connection Removable type screw terminal block (M3)
Number of output points / commons 1 point / 1 common (Each channel is independent.)
Surge removal circuit Varistor (Varistor voltage 423 to 517 V)
Fuse None
External power supply Not used
Internal current consumption (5 V DC) Approx. 220 mA

Signal
Terminal configuration No. Diagram of Internal circuit
name
[1] 0
[2] 1
[3] 2
[1] [4] 3
[10] LED
[2] [5] 4
[11] [6] 5
[3] 0
[12] [7] 6
[4]
[13] [8] 7
[5] [9] N.C. Internal
[14] C
[6] [10] C0 circuit
[15]
[7] [11] C1
[16] [12] C2
[8]
[17] [13] C3
[9] [14] C4
Screw for [18]
fixing
[15] C5
[16] C6
[17] C7
[18] N.C.

6 – 33
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(29) EH-YR12

Specification EH-YR12
Output specification Relay output
Number of output points 12 points
Rated load voltage 100 / 240 V AC, 24 V DC
Minimum switching current 1 mA (5 V DC), except a great current switching
Leak current None
Maximum load 1 circuit 2A
current 1 common 5A
Output OFFON Max. 10 ms
response time ONOFF Max. 10 ms
Insulation system Photo-coupler insulation
Output display LED display (green)
External connection Removable type screw terminal block (M3)
Number of output points / commons 12 points / 1 common (Common terminal is 2 points.)
Surge removal circuit None
Fuse None
External power supply 24 V DC (+10 %, -15 %) (70 mA at the maximum)
Internal current consumption (5 V DC) Approx. 40 mA

Signal
Terminal configuration No. Diagram of Internal circuit
name
[1] 24V DC+
[2] N.C.
[3] 0
[1] [4] 1 24 V DC+
[10] LED
[2] [5] 2
[11] [6] 3
[3] 0
[12] [7] 4
[4]
[13] [8] 5
[5] [9] C
[14] Internal
[6] [10] 24V DC-
[15] circuit 11
[7] [11] N.C.
[16] [12] 6 C
[8]
[17] [13] 7
[9] [14] 8
Screw for [18]
[15] 9 24 V DC-
fixing
[16] 10
[17] 11
[18] C

6 – 34
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(30) EH-YR16 / EH-YR16D

Item Specification
Type EH-YR16 EH-YR16D
Output specification Relay output
Rated load voltage 100 / 240 V AC, 24 V DC
Minimum switching current 1 mA
Leak current None
Maximum load 1 circuit 2A
current 1 common 8 A (Ambient temperature 40 ºC) 4 A (Ambient temperature 40 ºC)
See the below derating table See the below derating table
Output response OFF → ON Max. 10 ms
time ON → OFF Max. 10 ms
Number of output points 16 points / module
Number of common points 16 points / 1 common 8 points / 1 common
(Common terminal is 2)*1 (Common terminal is 2)*2
Surge removal circuit There is no Surge removal circuit and Fuse internal of this module.
Fuse Please Install proper device in the each output and / or the common line.
Insulation system Relay insulation
Output display LED (green)
External connection Removable type screw terminal block (M3)
Internal current consumption (5 V DC) Approximately 430 mA
*1 The common terminals are connected internally.
*2 The common terminals are separated.
Terminal configuration No. Signal name Diagram of Internal circuit
YR16 YR16D
[1] 0 0 5 V DC EH-YR16 EH-YR16D
[2] 1 1
Ry
[3] 2 2 0 0
[1]
[10] [4] 3 3 8
[2]
[11]
[5] 4 4 1
[3] [6] 5 5 9
[12]
[4] [7] 6 6
[13] [8] 7 7
[5]
[14] [9] C C0 15
[6]
[15] [10] 8 8 C C0
[7] [11] 9 9
[16] C C1
[8] [12] 10 10
[17]
[9] [13] 11 11
Screw for [18] [14] 12 12
fixing [15] 13 13 Derating table
[16] 14 14 EH-YR16
8
[17] 15 15
[18] C C1 7
Max. common current (A)

6
5
EH-YR16D
4
3.5 A
3
2
1
0 20 30 40 50 55

Ambient temperature (℃)

6 – 35
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(31) EH-YS16

Specification EH-YS16
Output specification Triac output
Number of output points 16 points
Rated load voltage 100 / 240 V AC (85 to 250 V AC)
Minimum switching current 10 mA
Leak current Max. 2 mA
Maximum load 1 circuit 0.3 A
current 1 common 4 A (Ambient temperature 45 °C), see the following derating table
Output OFFON Max. 1 ms
response time ONOFF Max. 1 ms + 1/2 cycle
Insulation system Photo-coupler triac insulation
Output display LED display (green)
External connection Removable type screw terminal block (M3)
Number of output points / commons 16 pints / 1 common
Surge removal circuit Varistor
Fuse 6.3 A (Mounting a fuse to external is necessary.)
Internal current consumption Approx. 250 mA

Signal
Terminal configuration No. Diagram of Internal output
name
[1] 0
[2] 1 LED

[3] 2
0
[1] [4] 3
[10]
Trigger circuit
Internal
[2] [5] 4 circuit
[11] [6] 5
[3]
[12] [7] 6 15
[4]
[13] [8] 7 C
[5] [9] C
[14]
[6] [10] 8 Derating table
[15]
[11] 9
Maximum common current (A)

[7] 4
[16] [12] 10
[8] 3
[17] [13] 11
[9] [14] 12 2
Screw for [18]
[15] 13
fixing 1
[16] 14
[17] 15 0 20 30 40 45 50 55
Ambient temperature (°C)
[18] C

6 – 36
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(32) EH-YT32

Specification EH-YT32
Output specification Transistor output (sink type)
Number of output points 32 points
Rated load voltage 12 / 24 V DC (+10 %, -15 %)
Minimum switching current 1 mA
Leak current 0.1 mA
Maximum load 1 circuit 0.2 A
current 1 common 6.4 A*1
Output OFFON Max. 0.3 ms
response time ONOFF Max. 1 ms
Insulation system Photo-coupler insulation
Output display LED display (green)*2
External connection Connector
Number of output points / commons 32 points / 1 common (Common terminal is 4 points.)
Surge removal circuit Diode
Fuse*3 10 A / 1 common
External power supply
12 / 24 V DC (+10 %, -15 %) (30 mA at the maximum)
(for supplying power to S-terminal)
Internal current consumption (5 V DC) Approx. 90 mA
Short-circuit protection function Available*4
*1 Total current of 4 common pins.
For each common pin of a connector, please make common current which is sent into one common pin into maximum 3 A.
*2 There are 16 points for each LED display. The display group is switched using a switch.
*3 The module needs to be repaired in case a fuse is blown out. But, users cannot replace the fuse.
*4 MFG No.01E** or later are applied.(MFG No.01E** indicates products of May 2001.)

Terminal Signal Signal


No. No. Diagram of Internal circuit
configuration name name
[1] 0 [21] 16
[2] 1 [22] 17
[3] 2 [23] 18
[4] 3 [24] 19
[1] [21] [5] 4 [25] 20
[6] 5 [26] 21 S
[7] 6 [27] 22 LED
0
[8] 7 [28] 23
[9] C [29] C
[10] S [30] S Internal
[11] 8 [31] 24 circuit 31
[12] 9 [32] 25
[13] 10 [33] 26 C
[14] 11 [34] 27
[15] 12 [35] 28
[20] [40] [16] 13 [36] 39
[17] 14 [37] 30
[18] 15 [38] 31
[19] C [39] C
[20] S [40] S
Applicable connector
- A 120mm (4.73 in.) space is required for the front of the module. Please choose the installing location (space) accordingly.
- Use a shield cable and always use a class D grounding.
Manufacturer Fujitsu Solder type Socket: FCN-361J040-AU, Cover: FCN-360C040-E
Takamizawa
Crimp type Housing: FCN-363J040, Contact: FCN-363J-AU
Pressure-displacement FCN-367J040-AU/F
type
AMP Solder type 1473381-1

6 – 37
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(33) EH-YTP32

Specification EH-YTP32
Output specification Transistor output (source type)
Number of output points 32 points
Rated load voltage 12 / 24 V DC (+10 %, -15 %)
Minimum switching current 1 mA
Leak current 0.1 mA
Maximum load 1 circuit 0.2 A
current 1 common 6.4 A*1
Output OFFON Max. 0.3 ms
response time ONOFF Max. 1 ms
Insulation system Photo-coupler insulation
Output display LED display (green)*2
External connection Connector
Number of output points / commons 32 points / 1 common (Common terminal is 4 points.)
Surge removal circuit Diode
Fuse*3 10 A / 1 common
External power supply (for supplying
12 / 24 V DC (+10 %, -15 %) (30 mA at the maximum)
power to S-terminal)
Internal current consumption (5 V DC) Approx. 90 mA
Short-circuit protection function Available*4
*1 Total current of 4 common pins.
For each common pin of a connector, please make common current which is sent into one common pin into maximum 3 A.
*2 There are 16 points for each LED display. The display group is switched using a switch.
*3 The module needs to be repaired in case a fuse is blown out. But, users cannot replace.
*4 MFG No.01E** or later are applied.(MFG No.01E** indicates products of May 2001.)

Terminal Signal Signal


No. No. Diagram of Internal circuit
configuration name name
[1] 0 [21] 16
[2] 1 [22] 17
[3] 2 [23] 18
[4] 3 [24] 19
[1] [21] [5] 4 [25] 20
[6] 5 [26] 21 LED
[7] 6 [27] 22 C
[8] 7 [28] 23
[9] C [29] C Internal
[10] S [30] S circuit 0
[11] 8 [31] 24
31
[12] 9 [32] 25
[13] 10 [33] 26 S
[14] 11 [34] 27
[15] 12 [35] 28
[20] [40]
[16] 13 [36] 29
[17] 14 [37] 30
[18] 15 [38] 31
[19] C [39] C
[20] S [40] S
Applicable cable
- A 120 mm (4.73 in.) space is required for the front of the module. Please choose the installing location (space) accordingly.
- Use a shield cable and always use a class D grounding.
Manufacturer Fujitsu Solder type Socket: FCN-361J040-AU, Cover: FCN-360C040-E
Takamizawa
Crimp type Housing: FCN-363J040, Contact: FCN-363J-AU
Pressure-displacement FCN-367J040-AU/F
type
AMP Solder type 1473381-1

6 – 38
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(34) EH-YT32E

Specification EH-YT32E
Output specification Transistor output (sink type)
Number of output points 32 points
Rated load voltage 12 / 24 V DC (+10 %, -15 %)
Minimum switching current 1 mA
Leak current 0.1 mA
Maximum load 1 circuit 0.2 A
current 1 common 1A
Output OFFON Max. 0.3 ms
response time ONOFF Max. 1 ms
Insulation system Photo-coupler insulation
Output display LED display (green)*1
External connection Spring type terminal block
Number of output points /
8 points / 1 common (Common terminal is 4 points.)
commons
Surge removal circuit Diode
Fuse*2 10 A / 1 common
External power supply
12 / 24 V DC (+10 %, -15 %) (30 mA at the maximum)
(for supplying power to S-terminal)
Internal current consumption
Approx. 90 mA
(5 V DC)
Short-circuit protection function Available
*1 There are 16 points for each LED display. The display group is switched using a switch.
*2 The module needs to be repaired in case a fuse is blown out. But, users cannot replace the fuse.

Terminal Signal Signal


No. No. Diagram of Internal circuit
configuration name name
[1] 0 [21] 16
[2] 1 [22] 17
[3] 2 [23] 18
[1] [21] [4] 3 [24] 19
[5] 4 [25] 20
S1
[6] 5 [26] 21
LED
[7] 6 [27] 22 0
[8] 7 [28] 23
[9] C1 [29] C3
[10] [30] Internal
[10] S1 [30] S3
[11] [31] circuit 7
[11] 8 [31] 24
[12] 9 [32] 25
[13] 10 [33] 26 C1
[14] 11 [34] 27
[15] 12 [35] 28
[16] 13 [36] 29
[20] [40]
[17] 14 [37] 30
[18] 15 [38] 31
[19] C2 [39] C4
[20] S2 [40] S4
Applicable connector Applicable cable
Manufacturer: Weidmuller 0.5 mm2 - 1.0 mm2 (shared at a twisted pair cable and a single core cable.)
Type: B2L3.5/20AUOR AWG 28 - 18
Product No.: 175736 A crimp terminal cannot be used.

6 – 39
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(35) EH-YTP32E

Specification EH-YTP32E
Output specification Transistor output (source type)
Number of output points 32 points
Rated load voltage 12 / 24 V DC (+10 %, -15 %)
Minimum switching current 1 mA
Leak current 0.1 mA
Maximum load 1 circuit 0.2 A
current 1 common 1A
Output OFFON Max. 0.3 ms
response time ONOFF Max. 1 ms
Insulation system Photo-coupler insulation
Output display LED display (green)*1
External connection Spring type terminal block
Number of output points / commons 8 points / 1 common (Common terminal is 4 points.)
Surge removal circuit Diode
Fuse*2 10 A / 1 common
External power supply
12 / 24 V DC (+10 %, -15 %) (30 mA at the maximum)
(for supplying power to S-terminal)
Internal current consumption
Approx. 90 mA
(5 V DC)
Short-circuit protection function Available
*1 There are 16 points for each LED display. The display group is switched using a switch.
*2 The module needs to be repaired in case a fuse is blown out. But, users cannot replace the fuse.

Terminal Signal Signal


No. No. Diagram of Internal circuit
configuration name name
[1] 0 [21] 16
[2] 1 [22] 17
[3] 2 [23] 18
[1] [21] [4] 3 [24] 19
[5] 4 [25] 20
[6] 5 [26] 21 LED
C1
[7] 6 [27] 22
[8] 7 [28] 23
[9] C1 [29] C3 Internal
[10] [30] circuit 0
[10] S1 [30] S3
[11] [31]
[11] 8 [31] 24
[12] 9 [32] 25 7
[13] 10 [33] 26
[14] 11 [34] 27 S1
[15] 12 [35] 28
[16] 13 [36] 29
[20] [40]
[17] 14 [37] 30
[18] 15 [38] 31
[19] C2 [39] C4
[20] S2 [40] S4
Applicable connectors Applicable cable
Manufacturer: Weidmuller 0.5 mm2 - 1.0 mm2 (shared at a twisted pair cable and a single core cable.
Type: B2L3.5/20AUOR AWG 28 - 18
Product No.: 175736 A crimp terminal cannot be used.

6 – 40
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(36) EH-YT32H

Item EH-YT32H POM-TM, POH-TM (for replacing)


Series HX / EH-150 EM / EM-II, H-200 / 250 / 252
Output specification Transistor output (sink type)
Number of output points 32 points
Rated load voltage 5 / 12 / 24 V DC (5 to 27 V DC)
Minimum switching current 1 mA
Leak current Max. 0.05 mA
Maximum output saturation voltage Max. 1 V
Maximum 1 point 0.1 A
load current 1 common 0.8 A
Output OFFON Max.A1 ms
response time ONOFF Max. 1 ms
Insulation method Photo-coupler insulation
Output display LED (green)*2 LED (red)
External connection Connector (50 pins)
Number of common points 8 points / 1 common
Surge removal circuit Diode (Connecting case of the S terminal)
Fuse*1 2 A / 1 common 1.5 A / 1 common
External power supply*3 5 to 27 V DC
(For supplying power to the S terminal) (maximum 100 mA)
Internal current consumption (5 V DC) Approx. 90 mA Approx. 70 mA
Short-circuit protection None
*1 The module needs to be repaired in case a load short causes a blown fuse. Further more, it is not allowed for user to replace a
fuse as safety reason.
*2 There are 16 points for each LED display. The display group is toggled using a switch. And, LED display is renewed by
refresh processing.
*3 It is necessary to supply 12 / 24 V DC to the S terminals.

Specification of external wiring connector


Wire
Product name Manufacturer Product No. Connection method

DX30-50P AWG#30
Untie crimping
DX30A-50P AWG#28

Plug connector DX31-50P AWG#30


Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. Crimping
DX31A-50P AWG#28

DX40-50P Soldering -

Die cast cover DX-50-CV1 - -

6 – 41
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

Terminal Signal Signal


No. No. Diagram of Internal circuit
configuration name name
[25] NC [50] NC
[24] NC [49] NC
[23] NC [48] NC
25 50
[22] NC [47] NC
[21] 15 [46] 31
[20] 14 [45] 30
[19] 13 [44] 29
[18] 12 [43] 28
[17] 11 [42] 27 EH-YT32H (This product)
[16] 10 [41] 26 POM-TM/POH-TM (for replacing)
[15] 9 [40] 25 S0
[14] 8 [39] 24
[13] S1 [38] S3 0
1 26 Internal
[12] C1 [37] C3 circuit
[11] NC [36] NC 7
[10] 7 [35] 23
[9] 6 [34] 22 C0 +
[8] 5 [33] 21
Please note it in [7] 4 [32] 20
the direction of [6] 3 [31] 19
[5] 2 [30] 18
the connector*1
[4] 1 [29] 17
[3] 0 [28] 16
[2] S0 [27] S2
[1] C0 [26] C2

*1 EH-XD32H has a turned connector to a 32-point I/O module for EM / H-200 series. Connect an external wiring cable

rotating 180 degrees around when replacing the module. (You cannot connect the cable in wrong direction due to the

structure for avoiding improper connection.)


EM / H-200 series HX series

0 4 8 12 Reverse connector Replacement


1 5 9 13
2 6 10 14
3 7 11 15
HITACHI

16 20 24 28
11 21 25 29
18 22 26 30
19 23 27 31

26 1

50 25
Rotate 180 degrees
around to connect

6 – 42
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(37) EH-YTT32

Specification EH-YTT32 Reference: YTT05BH


Output specification Sink type transistor (TTL level output)
Number of output points 32 points
Rated load voltage 5 V DC (4 to 15 V DC)
Minimum switching current 1 mA
Leak current Max. 50 µA
Maximum 1 circuit 20 mA
load current 1 common 320 mA
Maximum voltage drop 0.2 V DC
Output OFFON Max. 1 ms
response time ONOFF Max. 1 ms
Insulation method Photo-coupler insulation
Output display LED display (Green) LED display (Red)
External connection Connector Removable type screw terminal block (M3)
Number of output points / common 16 (2 commons, 4 terminals)
Surge removal circuit Diode
Fuse 1.6 A / 1 common *1 -
Internal current consumption Max. 100 mA Max. 180 mA
*1 If the fuse would blow, the module needs to be repaired. The fuse cannot be replaced.

Terminal Signal Signal


No. No. Diagram of Internal circuit
configuration name name
[1] 0 [21] 16 EH-CBM** (W)
EH-YTT32
[2] 1 [22] 17
S0
[3] 2 [23] 18
Internal 0
[4] 3 [24] 19
circuit 7
[5] 4 [25] 20
COM0
[6] 5 [26] 21 ~
[1] [21] S0
[7] 6 [27] 22
8
[8] 7 [28] 23
[9] COM0 [29] COM1 15

[10] S0 [30] S1 COM0 +

[11] 8 [31] 24 S1

[12] 9 [32] 25 16

[13] 10 [33] 26 23
[14] 11 [34] 27 COM1
[20] [40] ~
[15] 12 [35] 28 S1

[16] 13 [36] 29 24

[17] 14 [37] 30 31
[18] 15 [38] 31 COM1 +
[19] COM0 [39] COM1
[20] S0 [40] S1
Compatible connector
Please make sure to secure 120 mm space on the front of the module.
Please use a shield cable and always use a class D grounding.
Vender Fujitsu Solder Pin type Socket: FCN-361J040-AU, Cover: FCN-360C040-E
Crimp type Housing: FCN-363J040, Contact: FCN-363J-AU, Cover: FCN-360C040-E
IDC type Jack: FCN-367J040-AU/F
AMP Solder Pin type Connector: 1473381-1

6 – 43
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(38) EH-YT64

Specification EH-YTP64
Output specification Transistor output (source type)
Number of output points 64 points
Rated load voltage 12 / 24 V DC (+10 %, -15 %)
Minimum switching current 1 mA
Leak current 0.1 mA
Maximum load 1 circuit 0.1 A
current 1 common 3.2 A
Output OFFON Max. 0.3 ms
response time ONOFF Max. 1 ms
Insulation system Photo-coupler insulation
Output display LED display (green)*1
External connection Connector
Number of output points / commons 32 points / 1 common (Common terminal is 4 points each.)
Surge removal circuit Diode
Fuse*2 5 A / 1 common
External power supply
12 / 24 V DC (+10 %, -15 %) (100 mA at the maximum)
(for supplying power to S-terminal)
Internal current consumption (5 V DC) Approx. 120 mA
Short-circuit protection function Available
*1 There are 16 points for each LED display. The display group is switched using a switch.
*2 The module needs to be repaired in case a fuse is blown out. But, users cannot replace the fuse.

Signal Signal Signal Signal


Terminal configuration No. No. No. No. Diagram of Internal circuit
name name name name

[41] 32 [61] 48 [1] 0 [21] 16


[42] 33 [62] 49 [2] 1 [22] 17
[43] 34 [63] 50 [3] 2 [23] 18
[61] [21]
[41] [1]
[44] 35 [64] 51 [4] 3 [24] 19
[45] 36 [65] 52 [5] 4 [25] 20
[46] 37 [66] 53 [6] 5 [26] 21 LED
C1
[47] 38 [67] 54 [7] 6 [27] 22
[48] 39 [68] 55 [8] 7 [28] 23 Internal
[49] C2 [69] C2 [9] C1 [29] C1 circuit 0

[50] S2 [70] S2 [10] S1 [30] S1 31


[51] 40 [71] 56 [11] 8 [31] 24
S1
[52] 41 [72] 57 [12] 9 [32] 25
[53] 42 [73] 58 [13] 10 [33] 26
[54] 43 [74] 59 [14] 11 [34] 27
[80] [40] [55] 44 [75] 60 [15] 12 [35] 28
[60] [20]
[56] 45 [76] 61 [16] 13 [36] 29
[57] 46 [77] 62 [17] 14 [37] 30
[58] 47 [78] 63 [18] 15 [38] 31
[59] C2 [79] C2 [19] C1 [39] C1
[60] S2 [80] S2 [20] S1 [40] S1
Applicable connectors
- A 120 mm (4.73 in.) space is required for the front of the module. Please choose the installing location (space) accordingly.
- Use a shield cable and always use a class D grounding.
Manufacturer Fujitsu Solder type Socket: FCN-361J040-AU, Cover: FCN-360C040-E
Takamizawa
Crimp type Housing: FCN-363J040, Contact: FCN-363J-AU
Pressure-displacement Jack: FCN-367J040-AU/F
type
AMP Solder type Connector: 1473381-1

6 – 44
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(39) EH-YTP64

Specification EH-YTP64
Output specification Transistor output (source type)
Number of output points 64 points
Rated load voltage 12 / 24 V DC (+10 %, -15 %)
Minimum switching current 1 mA
Leak current 0.1 mA
Maximum load 1 circuit 0.1 A
current 1 common 3.2 A
Output OFFON Max. 0.3 ms
response time ONOFF Max. 1 ms
Insulation system Photo-coupler insulation
Output display LED display (green)*1
External connection Connector
Number of output points / commons 32 points / 1 common (Common terminal is 4 points each.)
Surge removal circuit Diode
Fuse*2 5 A / 1 common
External power supply
12 / 24 V DC (+10 %, -15 %) (100 mA at the maximum)
(for supplying power to S-terminal)
Internal current consumption (5 V DC) Approx. 120 mA
Short-circuit protection function Available
*1 There are 16 points for each LED display. The display group is switched using a switch.
*2 The module needs to be repaired in case a fuse is blown out. But, users cannot replace the fuse.

Signal Signal Signal Signal


Terminal configuration No. No. No. No. Diagram of Internal circuit
name name name name

[41] 32 [61] 48 [1] 0 [21] 16


[42] 33 [62] 49 [2] 1 [22] 17
[43] 34 [63] 50 [3] 2 [23] 18
[61] [21]
[41] [1]
[44] 35 [64] 51 [4] 3 [24] 19
[45] 36 [65] 52 [5] 4 [25] 20
[46] 37 [66] 53 [6] 5 [26] 21 LED
C1
[47] 38 [67] 54 [7] 6 [27] 22
[48] 39 [68] 55 [8] 7 [28] 23 Internal
[49] C2 [69] C2 [9] C1 [29] C1 circuit 0

[50] S2 [70] S2 [10] S1 [30] S1 31


[51] 40 [71] 56 [11] 8 [31] 24
S1
[52] 41 [72] 57 [12] 9 [32] 25
[53] 42 [73] 58 [13] 10 [33] 26
[54] 43 [74] 59 [14] 11 [34] 27
[80] [40] [55] 44 [75] 60 [15] 12 [35] 28
[60] [20]
[56] 45 [76] 61 [16] 13 [36] 29
[57] 46 [77] 62 [17] 14 [37] 30
[58] 47 [78] 63 [18] 15 [38] 31
[59] C2 [79] C2 [19] C1 [39] C1
[60] S2 [80] S2 [20] S1 [40] S1
Applicable connectors
- A 120 mm (4.73 in.) space is required for the front of the module. Please choose the installing location (space) accordingly.
- Use a shield cable and always use a class D grounding.
Manufacturer Fujitsu Solder type Socket: FCN-361J040-AU, Cover: FCN-360C040-E
Takamizawa
Crimp type Housing: FCN-363J040, Contact: FCN-363J-AU
Pressure-displacement Jack: FCN-367J040-AU/F
type
AMP Solder type Connector: 1473381-1

6 – 45
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(40) EH-MTT32

Specification EH-MTT32 Reference: PHM-TT


Input / output type TTL input (sink type) TTL output (sink type) TTL input (sink type) TTL output (sink type)
Number of input /
16 points 16 points 16 points 16 points
output points
Input / output voltage 4 to 27 V DC
Input current Approx. 6 mA (5 V DC) - Approx. 6 mA (5 V DC) -
Operating ON voltage Max. 1.5 V (5 V DC) - Max. 1.5 V (5 V DC) -
voltage OFF voltage Min. 3.5 V (5 V DC) - Min. 3.5 V (5 V DC) -
Maximum load current - 20 mA / point - 20 mA / point
Minimum load current - 1 mA / point - 1 mA / point
Maximum leak current - 50 μA - 50 μA
Output OFF → ON Max. 1 ms
response
time ON → OFF Max. 1 ms
Insulation method Photo-coupler insulation
Input / output display LED display (Green) -
External connection Connector (Compatible with PHM-TT)
Number of I/O points /
16 points / common 8 points / common 16 points / common 8 points / common
common
Fuse *1 0.63 A 1.6 A - 1.5 A
Internal current consumption Approx. 0.14 A Approx. 0.1 A
External power supply 4 to 27 V DC 4 to 27 V DC 4 to 27 V DC 4 to 27 V DC
capacity (terminal S) (Max. 0.2 A) (Max. 0.2 A) (Max. 0.2 A) (Max. 0.2 A)
*1 If the fuse would blow, the module needs to be repaired. The fuse cannot be replaced.

Terminal
Input Output Diagram of Internal circuit
configuration
No. Signal No. Signal
name name EH-MTT32 CBEM-**
0 1 2 3 IN
4 5 6 7 [1] C0 [2] C1 *3
8 9 10 11 OUT S0
[3] S0 [4] S1 *3 ~
12 13 14 15 Internal
TTL I/O EH-MTT32 [5] 0 [6] 16 0
circuit + Input
[7] 1 [8] 17 -
15
[9] 2 [10] 18
C0
[1] [2] [11] 3 [12] 19 +
[13] 4 [14] 20 S1
[15] 5 [16] 21
16
[17] 6 [18] 22
[19] 7 [20] 23 23
[21] NC *1 [22] C2 *3 C1 +
Output


Polarity [23] NC *1 [24] S2 *3
S2
guide *2 [25] 8 [26] 24
[27] 9 [28] 25 24
[29] 10 [30] 26 31
[31] 11 [32] 27
[39] [40] C2 +
[33] 12 [34] 28 ~
[35] 13 [36] 29
[37] 14 [38] 30
[39] 15 [40] 31
*1 NC is not internally connected.
*2 The polarity guide is located on the left side. Please pay attention to the direction of the connector.
*3 The Terminal S1 and S2, C1 and C2 are independent, respectively.

6 – 46
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

External wiring connector specifications (recommended)


The external wiring connector is compatible with EM and H-200 series TTL input / output module (PHM-TT). The
connector is not bundled. Please purchase it separately or directly from the following manufacturer.
Item Manufacturer Product number Termination Compatible wire
Socket AWG #28 flat cable UL2651
HIF3BA-40D-2.54R IDC
(with Polarizing Guide) (7 / 0.127 mm, Outer diameter 0.9±0.1 mm)
Housing (Crimp) HIF3BA-40D-2.54C AWG #20 - AWG #28

HIROSE HIF3-2226SC AWG #22 - AWG #26


Discrete-wire
Gold-plating discrete ELECTRIC HIF3-2428SC crimping AWG #24 - AWG #28
terminal
HIF3-2022SC AWG #20 - AWG #22

Crimping case cover HIF3-40CV(71) - Maximum outer diameter φ1.6 mm

EM
EM //H-200シリーズ
H-200 series EH-150 series
EH-150シリーズ
(70) 110 (70) 109
Please make sure to
外部配線用ケーブルの
secure at least 70 mm
ために、モジュール前
space
面に約70on themm
front of the
以上のス Replace
リプレース
module. However,
ペースが必要です。 in the
case of replacement,
ただし、リプレースの the
depth dimension
場合は、奥行寸法が右 is almost 140
the same as shown in the
図のように、ほぼ同等 100
figure on the right.
となります。

Wiring to meet CE marking


Please connect unused wires to the common. Otherwise, it may induce external noise and cause an unexpected
behavior.

EH-MTT32 Shielded cable


+ External power supply
S0

X0
X1

Signal wire

C0
Common Unused wire
Class D ground

6 – 47
Chapter 6 Digital I/O Module

(41) EH-MTT32A

Specification EH-MTT32A
Input / output specification TTL input (sink type) TTL output (sink type)
Number of input / output
16 points 16 points
points
Input / output voltage 3 to 15 V DC 4 to 15 V DC
Input current Approx. 5 mA (5 V DC) -
Operating ON voltage Max. 1.5 V (5 V DC) -
voltage OFF voltage Min. 3.5 V (5 V DC) -
Maximum load current - 20 mA / point
Minimum load current - 1 mA / point
Maximum leak current - 50 μA
Input / output OFFON Max. 1 ms
response time ONOFF Max. 1 ms
Insulation method Photo-coupler insulation
Input / output display LED display (Green)
External connection Connector
Number of I/O points /
16 points (2 commons, 4 terminals)
common
Fuse *1 0.63 A / 1 common 1.6 A / 1 common
External power supply
Max. 0.12 A (5 V DC), Max. 0.2 A (15 V DC) Max. 0.02 A
capacity (terminal S)
Internal current consumption Approx. 90 mA
*1 If the fuse would blow, the module needs to be repaired. The fuse cannot be replaced.

Terminal
Input Output Diagram of Internal circuit
configuration

Signal Signal EH-CBM** (W)


No. No. EH-MTT32A
name name
S0
[1] 0 [21] 16
[2] 1 [22] 17 Internal 0
circuit +

[3] 2 [23] 18 - 7

[4] 3 [24] 19 COM0


Input
[1] [21]
[5] 4 [25] 20 S0
[6] 5 [26] 21 8
[7] 6 [27] 22
15
[8] 7 [28] 23
COM0 +
[9] COM0 [29] COM1
[10] S0 [30] S1 S1

[11] 8 [31] 24 16
[12] 9 [32] 25 23
[13] 10 [33] 26 COM1
Output

[14] 11 [34] 27 ~
[20] [40] S1
[15] 12 [35] 28
24
[16] 13 [36] 29
[17] 14 [37] 30 31

[18] 15 [38] 31 COM1 +

[19] COM0 [39] COM1


[20] S0 [40] S1
Compatible connector
Please make sure to secure 120 mm space on the front of the module.
Please use a shield cable and always use a class D grounding.
Vender Fujitsu Solder Pin type Socket: FCN-361J040-AU, Cover: FCN-360C040-E
Crimp type Housing: FCN-363J040, Contact: FCN-363J-AU, Cover: FCN-360C040-E
IDC type Jack: FCN-367J040-AU/F
AMP Solder Pin type Connector: 1473381-1

6 – 48
Chapter 7 Analog I/O Module,
Resistance Temperature Detector Input Module,
Thermocouple Input Module
7.1 12-bit Analog I/O Module

Name and function of each part EH-AX44


(Approx. 0.18 kg (0.41 lb))
EH-AX8V, AX8H
(Approx. 0.18 kg (0.41 lb))
EH-AX8I, AX8IO
(Approx. 0.18 kg (0.41 lb))
EH-AY22
Type (Weight)
(Approx. 0.18 kg (0.41 lb))
EH-AY2H
(Approx. 0.18 kg (0.41 lb))
EH-AY4V, AY4H
(Approx. 0.18 kg (0.41 lb))
EH-AY4I
(Approx. 0.18 kg (0.41 lb))
Terminal
Dimensions
block cover
(mm (in.))

30 (1.18) 95 (3.74)
100 (3.94)

Terminal block

Item Description
Terminal block This is a terminal block for connecting the I/O signals. The terminal block is removable.
Screws for the terminal block are M3 screw. Use a crimp terminal fitting to the screw diameter.
The maximum thickness of the cable should be 0.75 mm2. (Use a 0.5 mm2 cable when attaching two
crimp terminals to the same terminal.)
Recommended crimp terminal is shown below.

6 (0.24) (Recommended) 6.4


7.6
Take great care on handling
6 (0.24) the terminal because it may
fall off if the screw is loose. M3 screw
Unit: mm (in.)
8.2

Terminal block cover This is a covert for installing on the terminal block.

7–1
Chapter 7 Analog I/O Module, Resistance Temperature Detector Input Module, Thermocouple Input Module

(1) EH-AX44

Specification EH-AX44
Current range 4 to 20 mA
Voltage range 0 to 10 V DC
Number of channels Current 4 (0 to 3 channels)
Voltage 4 (4 to 7 channels)
Resolution 12 bits
Conversion time Max. 5 ms
Overall accuracy Max. ±1 % (of full-scale value)
Input impedance Current Approx. 100 Ω
Voltage Approx. 100 kΩ
Insulation system Channel and Internal circuit Photo-coupler insulation
Between channels No insulation
External connection Removable type screw terminal block (M3)
External power supply 24 V DC (+20 %, -15 %) Approx. 150 mA (Approx. 400 mA at power ON)
External wiring 2-core shield cable (Max. 20 m (65.62 ft.))
Internal current consumption Approx. 100 mA

Signal
Terminal configuration No. Diagram of Internal circuit
name
[1] I0 +
[2] I1 +
[3] I2 +
[1] [4] I3 + I0 +
[10] [5] V4 +
[2] I0 -
[11] [6] V5 + I3 +
[3]
[12] [7] V6 + I3 -
[4] [8] V7 +

Internal circuit
[13]
[5] [9] 24 V DC + V4 +
[14]
[6] [10] I0 - V4 -
[15] [11] I1 -
[7] V7 +
[16] [12] I2 -
[8] V7 -
[17] [13] I3 -
[9]
[18] [14] V4 - 24 V DC+
Screw for
fixing [15] V5 - 24 V DC-
[16] V6 -
[17] V7 -
[18] 24 V DC -
Support to analog data and digital data

H0FFF H0FFF

H07FF H07FF

H0000 mA H0000 V
4 12 20 0 5 10
Input current Input voltage

7–2
Chapter 7 Analog I/O Module, Resistance Temperature Detector Input Module, Thermocouple Input Module

(2) EH-AX8V

Specification EH-AX8V
Current range -
Voltage range 0 to 10 V DC
Number of channels Current -
Voltage 8 (0 to 7 channels)
Resolution 12 bits
Conversion time Max. 5 ms
Overall accuracy Max. ±1 % (of full-scale value)
Input impedance Current -
Voltage Approx. 100 kΩ
Insulation system Channel and Internal circuit Photo-coupler insulation
Between channels No insulation
External connection Removable type screw terminal block (M3)
External power supply 24 V DC (+20 %, -15 %) Approx. 150 mA (Approx. 400 mA at power ON)
External wiring 2-core shield cable (Max. 20 m)
Internal current consumption Approx. 100 mA

Signal
Terminal configuration No. Diagram of Internal circuit
name
[1] V0 +
[2] V1 +
[3] V2 +
[1] [4] V3 + V0 +
[10] [5] V4 +
[2] V0 -
[11] [6] V5 +
[3]
[12] [7] V6 +
[4] [8] V7 +

Internal circuit
[13]
[5] [9] 24 V DC + V7 +
[14]
[6] [10] V0 - V7 -
[15] [11] V1 -
[7]
[16] [12] V2 -
[8]
[17] [13] V3 -
[9]
[18] [14] V4 -
Screw for 24 V DC+
fixing [15] V5 -
24 V DC-
[16] V6 -
[17] V7 -
[18] 24 V DC -
Support to analog data and digital data

H0FFF

H07FF

H0000 V
0 5 10
Input voltage

7–3
Chapter 7 Analog I/O Module, Resistance Temperature Detector Input Module, Thermocouple Input Module

(3) EH-AX8H

Specification EH-AX8H
Current range -
Voltage range + / - 10 V DC
Number of channels Current -
Voltage 8 (0 to 7 channels)
Resolution 12 bits
Conversion time Max. 5 ms
Overall accuracy Max. ±1 % (of full-scale value)
Input impedance Current -
Voltage Approx. 100 kΩ
Insulation system Channel and Internal circuit Photo-coupler insulation
Between channels No insulation
External connection Removable type screw terminal block (M3)
External power supply 24 V DC (+20 %, -15 %) Approx. 150 mA (Approx. 400 mA at power ON)
External wiring 2-core shield cable (Max. 20 m)
Internal current consumption Approx. 100 mA

Signal
Terminal configuration No. Diagram of Internal circuit
name
[1] V0 +
[2] V1 +
[3] V2 +
V0 +
[1] [4] V3 +
[10] V0 -
[5] V4 +
[2]
[11] [6] V5 +
[3]
[12] [7] V6 +

Internal circuit
[4] [8] V7 +
[13] V7 +
[5] [9] 24 V DC +
[14] V7 -
[6] [10] V0 -
[15] [11] V1 -
[7]
[16] [12] V2 -
[8]
[17] [13] V3 -
[9] 24 V DC+
[18] [14] V4 -
Screw for
[15] V5 - 24 V DC-
fixing
[16] V6 -
[17] V7 -
[18] 24 V DC -
Support to analog data and digital data

H07FF

-10
V
0 +10
Input voltage

H0800

(A complement of 2)

7–4
Chapter 7 Analog I/O Module, Resistance Temperature Detector Input Module, Thermocouple Input Module

(4) EH-AX8I

Specification EH-AX8I
Current range 4 to 20 mA
Voltage range -
Number of channels Current 8 (0 to 7 channels)
Voltage -
Resolution 12 bits
Conversion time Max. 5 ms
Overall accuracy Max. ±1 % (of full-scale value)
Input impedance Current Approx. 100 Ω
Voltage -
Insulation system Channel and Internal circuit Photo-coupler insulation
Between channels No insulation
External connection Removable type screw terminal block (M3)
External power supply 24 V DC (+20 %, -15 %) Approx. 150 mA (Approx. 400 mA at power ON)
External wiring 2-core shield cable (Max. 20 m)
Internal current consumption Approx. 100 mA

Signal
Terminal configuration No. Diagram of Internal circuit
name
[1] I0 +
[2] I1 +
[3] I2 +
[1] [4] I3 + I0 +
[10] [5] I4 +
[2] I0 -
[11] [6] I5 +
[3]
[12] [7] I6 +
[4] [8] I7 +

Internal circuit
[13]
[5] [9] 24 V DC +
[14]
[6] [10] I0 - I7 +
[15] [11] I1 -
[7] I7 -
[16] [12] I2 -
[8]
[17] [13] I3 -
[9]
[18] [14] I4 -
Screw for 24 V DC+
fixing [15] I5 -
24 V DC-
[16] I6 -
[17] I7 -
[18] 24 V DC -
Support to analog data and digital data

H0FFF

H07FF

H0000 mA
4 12 20
Input current

7–5
Chapter 7 Analog I/O Module, Resistance Temperature Detector Input Module, Thermocouple Input Module

(5) EH-AX8IO

Specification EH-AX8IO
Current range 0 to 22 mA
Voltage range -
Number of channels Current 8 (0 to 7 channels)
Voltage -
Resolution 12 bits
Conversion time Max. 5 ms
Overall accuracy Max. ±1% (of full-scale value)
Input impedance Current Approx. 100 Ω
Voltage -
Insulation system Channel and Internal circuit Photo-coupler insulation
Between channels No insulation
External connection Removable type screw terminal block (M3)
External power supply 24 V DC (+20 %, -15 %) Approx. 150 mA (Approx. 400 mA at power ON)
External wiring 2-core shield cable (Max. 20 m)
Internal current consumption Approx. 100 mA

Signal
Terminal configuration No. Diagram of Internal circuit
name
[1] I0 +
[2] I1 +
[3] I2 +
[1] [4] I3 + I0 +
[10] [5] I4 +
[2] I0 -
[11] [6] I5 +
[3]
[12] [7] I6 +
[4] [8] I7 +

Internal circuit
[13]
[5] [9] 24 V DC +
[14]
[6] [10] I0 - I7 +
[15] [11] I1 -
[7] I7 -
[16] [12] I2 -
[8]
[17] [13] I3 -
[9]
[18] [14] I4 -
Screw for 24 V DC+
fixing [15] I5 -
24 V DC-
[16] I6 -
[17] I7 -
[18] 24 V DC -
Support to analog data and digital data

H0FFF

H07FF

H0000 mA
0 11 22
Input current

7–6
Chapter 7 Analog I/O Module, Resistance Temperature Detector Input Module, Thermocouple Input Module

(6) EH-AY22

Specification EH-AY22
Current range 4 to 20 mA
Voltage range 0 to 10 V DC
Number of channels Current 2 (2 to 3 channels)
Voltage 2 (0 to 1 channels)
Resolution 12 bits
Conversion time Max. 5 ms
Overall accuracy Max. ±1 % (of full-scale value)
External Current 0 to 500 Ω
load resistance Voltage Min. 10 kΩ
Insulation system Channel and Internal circuit Photo-coupler insulation
Between channels No insulation
External connection Removable type screw terminal block (M3)
External power supply 24 V DC (+20 %, -15 %) Approx. 150 mA (Approx. 500 mA at power ON)
External wiring 2-core shield cable (Max. 20 m)
Internal current consumption Approx. 100 mA

Signal
Terminal configuration No. Diagram of Internal circuit
name
[1] V0 +
[2] V1 +
[3] I2 +
[1] [4] I3 + V0 +
[10] [5] N.C.
[2] V0 -
[11] [6] N.C.
[3] V1 +
[12] [7] N.C.
[4] V1 -
[8] N.C.
Internal circuit

[13]
[5] [9] 24 V DC +
[14] I2 +
[6] [10] V0 -
[15] I2 -
[7] [11] V1 -
I3 +
[16] [12] I2 -
[8] I3 -
[17] [13] I3 -
[9]
[18] [14] N.C.
Screw for 24 V DC+
fixing [15] N.C.
24 V DC-
[16] N.C.
[17] N.C.
[18] 24 V DC -
Support to analog data and digital data

20 10
Output voltage (V)
Output current (mA)

12
5

4
0
H0000 H07FF H0FFF H0000 H07FF H0FFF

7–7
Chapter 7 Analog I/O Module, Resistance Temperature Detector Input Module, Thermocouple Input Module

(7) EH-AY2H

Specification EH-AY2H
Current range -
Voltage range + / - 10 V DC
Number of channels Current -
Voltage 2 (0 to 1 channels)
Resolution 12 bits
Conversion time Max. 5 ms
Overall accuracy Max. ±1 % (of full-scale value)
External Current -
load resistance Voltage 10 kΩor more
Insulation system Channel and Internal circuit Photo-coupler insulation
Between channels No insulation
External connection Removable type screw terminal block (M3)
External power supply 24 V DC (+20 %, -15 %) Approx. 150 mA (Approx. 500 mA at power ON)
External wiring 2-core shield cable (Max. 20 m)
Internal current consumption Approx. 100 mA

Signal
Terminal configuration No. Diagram of Internal circuit
name
[1] V0 +
[2] V1 +
[3] N.C.
[1] [4] N.C. V0 +
[10] [5] N.C.
[2] V0 -
[11] [6] N.C.
[3] V1 +
[12] [7] N.C.
[4] V1 -
[8] N.C.
Internal circuit

[13]
[5] [9] 24 V DC +
[14]
[6] [10] V0 -
[15]
[7] [11] V1 -
[16] [12] N.C.
[8]
[17] [13] N.C.
[9]
[18] [14] N.C.
Screw for 24 V DC+
fixing [15] N.C.
24 V DC-
[16] N.C.
[17] N.C.
[18] 24 V DC -
Support to analog data and digital data
V
Output voltage

+10

H0800
0 H07FF
(A complement of 2)

-10

7–8
Chapter 7 Analog I/O Module, Resistance Temperature Detector Input Module, Thermocouple Input Module

(8) EH-AY4I

Specification EH-AY4I
Current range 4 to 20 mA
Voltage range -
Number of channels Current 4 (0 to 3 channels)
Voltage -
Resolution 12 bits
Conversion time Max. 5 ms
Overall accuracy Max. ±1 % (of full-scale value)
External Current 0 to 350Ω
load resistance Voltage -
Insulation system Channel and Internal circuit Photo-coupler insulation
Between channels No insulation
External connection Removable type screw terminal block (M3)
External power supply 24 V DC (+20 %, -15 %) Approx. 150 mA (Approx. 500 mA at power ON)
External wiring 2-core shield cable (Max. 20 m)
Internal current consumption Approx. 130 mA

Signal
Terminal configuration No. Diagram of Internal circuit
name
[1] I0 +
[2] I1 +
[3] I2 +
[1] [4] I3 + I0 +
[10] [5] N.C.
[2] I0 -
[11] [6] N.C.
[3] I1 +
[12] [7] N.C.
[4] I1 -
[8] N.C.
Internal circuit

[13]
[5] [9] 24 V DC +
[14] I2 +
[6] [10] I0 -
[15] I2 -
[7] [11] I1 -
[16] I3 +
[8] [12] I2 -
I3 -
[17] [13] I3 -
[9]
Screw for [18] [14] N.C.
24 V DC+
fixing [15] N.C.
24 V DC-
[16] N.C.
[17] N.C.
[18] 24 V DC -
Support to analog data and digital data

20
Output current (mA)

12

H0000 H07FF H0FFF

7–9
Chapter 7 Analog I/O Module, Resistance Temperature Detector Input Module, Thermocouple Input Module

(9) EH-AY4V

Specification EH-AY4V
Current range -
Voltage range 0 to 10 V DC
Number of channels Current -
Voltage 4 (0 to 3 channels)
Resolution 12 bits
Conversion time Max. 5 ms
Overall accuracy Max. ±1 % (of full-scale value)
External load resistance Current -
Voltage 10 kΩor more
Insulation system Channel and Internal circuit Photo-coupler insulation
Between channels No insulation
External connection Removable type screw terminal block (M3)
External power supply 24 V DC (+20 %, -15 %) Approx. 150 mA (Approx. 500 A at power ON)
External wiring 2-core shield cable (Max. 20 m)
Internal current consumption Approx. 100 mA

Signal
Terminal configuration No. Diagram of Internal circuit
name
[1] V0 +
[2] V1 +
[3] V2 +
[1] [4] V3 + V0 +
[10] [5] N.C.
[2] V0 -
[11] [6] N.C.
[3] V1 +
[12] [7] N.C.
[4] V1 -
[8] N.C.
Internal circuit

[13]
[5] [9] 24 V DC +
[14] V2 +
[6] [10] V0 -
[15] V2 -
[7] [11] V1 -
V3 +
[16] [12] V2 -
[8] V3 -
[17] [13] V3 -
[9]
[18] [14] N.C.
Screw for 24 V DC+
fixing [15] N.C.
24 V DC-
[16] N.C.
[17] N.C.
[18] 24 V DC -
Support to analog data and digital data
Output voltage (V)

10

0
H0000 H07FF H0FFF

7 – 10
Chapter 7 Analog I/O Module, Resistance Temperature Detector Input Module, Thermocouple Input Module

(10) EH-AY4H

Specification EH-AY4H
Current range -
Voltage range + / - 10 V DC
Number of channels Current -
Voltage 4 (0 to 3 channels)
Resolution 12 bits
Conversion time Max. 5 ms
Overall accuracy Max. ±1 % (of full-scale value)
External load Current -
resistance Voltage Min. 10 kΩ
Insulation system Channel and Internal circuit Photo-coupler insulation
Between channels No insulation
External connection Removable type screw terminal block (M3)
External power supply 24 V DC (+20 %, -15 %) Approx. 150 mA (Approx. 500 mA at power ON)
External wiring 2-core shield cable (Max. 20 m)
Internal current consumption Approx. 100 mA

Signal
Terminal configuration No. Diagram of Internal circuit
name
[1] V0 +
[2] V1 +
[3] V2 +
[1] [4] V3 + V0 +
[10] [5] N.C.
[2] V0 -
[11] [6] N.C.
[3] V1 +
[12] [7] N.C.
[4] V1 -
[8] N.C.
Internal circuit

[13]
[5] [9] 24 V DC +
[14] V2 +
[6] [10] V0 -
[15] V2 -
[7] [11] V1 -
V3 +
[16] [12] V2 -
[8] V3 -
[17] [13] V3 -
[9]
[18] [14] N.C.
Screw for 24 V DC+
fixing [15] N.C.
24 V DC-
[16] N.C.
[17] N.C.
[18] 24 V DC -
Support for analog data and digital data
V
Output voltage

+10

H0800
0 H07FF
(A complement of 2)

-10

7 – 11
Chapter 7 Analog I/O Module, Resistance Temperature Detector Input Module, Thermocouple Input Module

7.2 14-bit Analog I/O Module

Name and function of each part EH-AXH8M (Approx. 0.15 kg


(0.34 lb))
Type (Weight)
EH-AXH8M EH-AYH8M (Approx. 0.18 kg
(0.41 lb))
Setting switch
Dimensions
(mm (in.))

30 (1.18) 95 (3.74)

Current and voltage switch

100 (3.94)

EH-AYH8M

Setting switch

Current and
voltage
switch

Name Description
Setting switch Sets the switching of the I/O range, valid / invalid of the input filter, and resolution.
Current and voltage switch Switches current and voltage depending on the range of a setting switch.

Front view of LED Indicating contents


OK: Light is on when the module is normal.
0 to 7: Light is off when normal.
OK
0 1 2 3
[EH-AXH8M]
4 5 6 7 LED corresponding to the channel flashes if the input becomes maximum 2mA when the range is 4 to 22 mA.
ANAROG IN EH-AXH8M (when selecting 0.002 mA resolution.)
[EH-AYH8M]
LED corresponding to the channel flashes if the data outside the output range is set.

7 – 12
Chapter 7 Analog I/O Module, Resistance Temperature Detector Input Module, Thermocouple Input Module

(1) EH-AXH8M

Specification EH-AXH8M
Current range 0 to 22 mA / 4 to 22 mA
Voltage range 0 to 10 V DC / -10 to 10 V DC
Number of channels Current
8 channels (can switch current / voltage in 4-ch unit)
Voltage
Resolution Current 0.002 mA or 1 / 16,384 (14 bits)
Voltage 1 mV or 1 / 16,384 (14 bits)
Conversion time 8.9 ms / 8 channels
Overall accuracy Current Max. ±0.8 % (of full-scale value)
Voltage Max. ±0.5 % (of full-scale value)
Linear error Max. ±0.1 % (of full-scale value)
Input filter Valid Approx. 90 ms (90 % arriving time after the step input)
Invalid Max. 18 ms (90 % arriving time after the step input)
Input impedance Current 249 Ω
Voltage Differential 200 kΩ
Insulation system Channel and Internal circuit Photo-coupler insulation
Between channels No insulation
External connection Removable type screw terminal block (M3)
External power supply 24 V DC (+20 %, -15 %) Approx. 40 mA (Approx. 300 mA at power ON)
External wiring 2-core shield cable (Max. 20 m)
Internal current consumption Approx. 70 mA

Signal
Terminal configuration No. Diagram of Internal circuit
name
[1] 0+
0+
[2] 1+
[3] 2+ Voltage⋅Current

[4] 3+ 0-
[1]
[10] [5] 4+
1+
[2] [6] 5+
[11]
[3] [7] 6+ Voltage⋅Current
[12]
Internal circuit

[8] 7+ 1-
[4]
[13] [9] 24 V DC+
[5]
[14] [10] 0-
[6] 7+
[15] [11] 1-
[7]
[16] [12] 2- Voltage⋅Current
[8] 7-
[17] [13] 3-
[9] [14] 4- External
Screw for [18] power supply
[15] 5- Internal
fixing
[16] 6- 24 V DC + Power
circuit
[17] 7-
24 V DC -
[18] 24 V DC-

7 – 13
Chapter 7 Analog I/O Module, Resistance Temperature Detector Input Module, Thermocouple Input Module

Setting switch Support to analog data and digital data

Switch Setup Function 0 to 10 V DC


No.
3FFFH(16,383)
1, 2 1 2 0 to 3 channel input range switching Resolution 1/16,384
OFF OFF 0 to 10 V DC 2710H(10,000)
ON OFF -10 to 10 V DC 1FFFH(8,191)
OFF ON 0 to 22 mA 1388H(5,000) Resolution 1 mV
ON ON 4 to 22 mA
3, 4 3 4 4 to 7 channel input range switching V
0 5 10
OFF OFF 0 to 10 V DC
ON OFF -10 to 10 V DC -10 to 10 V DC
Resolution 1/16,384
OFF ON 0 to 22 mA 2710H(10,000)
1FFFH(8,191)
ON ON 4 to 22 mA Resolution 1 mV
5 5 Input filter
OFF Valid -10 0000H(0) V
0 10
ON Invalid
6 6 Resolution switching (A complement of 2)
OFF 1 / 16,384 (14 bits) E000H(-8,192)
D8F0H(-10,000)
ON 1 mV to 0.002 mA
7 7 (System mode) 0 to 22 mA
OFF Always OFF (Do not turn ON) 3FFFH(16,383)
8 8 (System mode) 3A2EH(14,894)
Resolution 1/16,384
2AF8H(11,000)
OFF Always OFF (Do not turn ON) 2710H(10,000)
Current and Voltage 1FFFH(8,191)
switch 1388H(5,000) Resolution 0.002 mA

Switch Setup Function mA


No. 0 10 20 22
1 to 8 1 to 4 5 to 8 Switching of current and voltage
4 to 22 mA
3FFFH(16,383)
OFF OFF 0 to 7 channel voltage input 38E3H(14,563)
Resolution 1/16,384
2328H(9,000)
ON OFF 0 to 3 channel current input 1F40H(8,000)
4 to 7 channel voltage input
1555H(5,461)
OFF ON 0 to 3 channel voltage input Resolution 0.002 mA
0FA0H(3,000)
4 to 7 channel current input 0H(0) mA
ON ON 0 to 7 channel current input F830H(-2,000) 0 4 10 20 22

[Setups shown in the white font on black background are initial factory setting:]
* In this module, be sure to perform the above setup before use. Further, be sure to turn off the power in setting up. Otherwise, the
setups are invalid. And when the input range is switched with the function selectable switch, be sure to set the current / voltage
switch to the corresponding range accordingly.

7 – 14
Chapter 7 Analog I/O Module, Resistance Temperature Detector Input Module, Thermocouple Input Module

(2) EH-AYH8M

Specification EH-AYH8M
Current range 0 to 22 mA / 4 to 22 mA
Voltage range 0 to 10 V DC
Number of Current
8 channels (can switch current and voltage in 4-ch unit)
channels Voltage
Resolution Current 0.002 mA or 1 / 16,384 (14 bits)
Voltage 1 mV or 1 / 16,384 (14 bits)
Conversion time 8.9 ms / 8 channels
Overall Current Max. ±0.8 % (of full-scale value)
accuracy Voltage Max. ±0.8 % (of full-scale value)
Linear error Max. ±0.2 % (of full-scale value) (range from 0 to 10 V and from 0.05 to 22 mA)
Output filter Valid Approx. 200 ms or less (90 % arriving time after setting)
Invalid Approx. 18 ms or less (90 % arriving time after setting)
Output Current Max. 400 Ω
impedance Voltage Max. 10 kΩ
Insulation Channel and Internal circuit Photo-coupler insulation
system Between channels No insulation
External connection Removable type screw terminal block (M3)
External power supply 24 V DC (+20 %, -15 %) Approx. 150 mA (Approx. 400 mA at power ON)
External wiring 2-core shield cable (Max. 20 m)
Internal current consumption Approx. 70 mA

Terminal configuration No. Signal name Diagram of Internal circuit


[1] 0+
Voltage⋅Current
[2] 1+
0+
[3] 2+
[4] 3+ 0-
[1]
[10] [5] 4+
[2]
[11] [6] 5+
[3] 1+
[12]
[7] 6+
Internal circuit

[4] [8] 7+ 1-
[13]
[5] [9] 24 V DC+
[14]
[6] [10] 0-
[15] [11] 1- 7+
[7]
[16] [12] 2-
[8] 7-
[17] [13] 3-
[9] External power
[18] [14] 4- supply
Screw for + 24 V DC
fixing [15] 5- Internal
power
[16] 6- circuit - 24 V DC
[17] 7-
[18] 24 V DC-

7 – 15
Chapter 7 Analog I/O Module, Resistance Temperature Detector Input Module, Thermocouple Input Module

Setting switch Support to analog data and digital data

No. Setup Function


0 to 10 V DC
1, 2 1 2 0 to 3 channel output range switching
V
OFF OFF 0 to 10 V DC 10
ON OFF Resolution 1mV
OFF ON 0 to 22 mA
ON ON 4 to 22 mA Resolution 1/16,384
5
3, 4 3 4 4 to 7 channel output range switching
OFF OFF 0 to 10 V DC
ON OFF 0
OFF ON 0 to 22 mA 1388H 1FFFH 2710H 3FFFH
(5,000) (8,191) (10,000) (16,383)
ON ON 4 to 22 mA
5 5 Output filter
OFF Invalid 0 to 22 mA
ON Valid mA
6 6 Resolution switching 22
20
OFF 1 / 16,384 (14 bits)
ON 1 mV or 0.002 mA
Resolution 1/16,384
7 7 (System mode)
10
OFF Always OFF (Do not turn ON)
8 8 (System mode)
OFF Always OFF (Do not turn ON) 0
1388H 1D17H 2710H 3A2EH
Current and voltage switch (5,000) (7,447) (10,000) (14,894)

Current and voltage switch


4 to 22 mA
0 to 3 channel mA
Current 22
Resolution 0.002mA
20
Voltage
Resolution 1/16,384

10
Current and voltage switch
4 to 7 channel 4
Current
0
F830H 0FA0H 1555H 1F40H 38E3H
Voltage (-2,000) (3,000) (5,461) (8,000) (14,563)

Reference) The images is as follows when the output filter is valid.


(Output filter: Invalid) (Output filter: Valid)

90% 90%

Ma.x 18 ms Approx. 200 ms

[Setups shown in the white font on black background are initial factory setting:]
* In this module, be sure to perform the above setups before use. Further, be sure to turn of the power in setting up. Otherwise, the
setups are invalid. And when the input range is switched with the function selectable switch, be sure to set the current / voltage
switch to the corresponding range accordingly.

7 – 16
Chapter 7 Analog I/O Module, Resistance Temperature Detector Input Module, Thermocouple Input Module

7.3 Isolated Analog I/O Module

Name and function of each part EH-AXG5M (Approx. 0.15 kg


(0.34 lb))
Type (Weight)
EH-AYG4M (Approx. 0.15 kg
(0.34 lb))
Dimensions
Setting switch (mm (in.))

30 (1.18) 95 (3.74)

100 (3.94)
Terminal block

Name Description
Terminal block This is a terminal block for connecting the I/O signals. The terminal block is removable.
Screws for the terminal block are M3 screws. Use a crimp terminal fitting to the screw diameter.
The maximum thickness of cable is 0.75 mm2. (Use a 0.5 mm2 cable when attaching two crimp
terminals to the same terminal.)
The recommended crimp terminal is shown below.

6 (0.24) (Recommended)

Take great care on handling the terminal


6 (0.24) because it may fall off if the screw is
loose.
Unit: mm (in.)

Setting switch Sets the switching of the I/O range, valid / invalid of the input filter, and resolution.

Front view of LED Indicating contents


OK: Light is on when the module is normal.
EH-AXG5M HS : Light up when this module is high speed conversion mode.
Light is turned off when this module is high accuracy mode.
OK HS 16b 12b
0 1 2 3 16b : Light up when this module is high resolution mode.
4
12b : Light up when this module is 12 bit resolution mode.
ANALOG IN EH-AXG5M
0 to 7: Light is off when normal. LED corresponding to the channel flashes if the input becomes maximum 2
mA when the range is 4 to 22 mA.(when selecting high resolution mode.)
EH-AYG4M OK: Light is on when the module is normal.
16b : Light up when this module is high resolution mode.
OK 16b 12b
0 1 2 3 12b : Light up when this module is 12 bit resolution mode.
0 to 3 : In case of current range, LED of each channel is blinking when wire breaking (when current mode)
ANALOG OUT EH-AYG4M
or out of data range was detected.

7 – 17
Chapter 7 Analog I/O Module, Resistance Temperature Detector Input Module, Thermocouple Input Module

(1) EH-AXG5M

Specification EH-AXG5M
Current range 0 to 22 mA / 4 to 22 mA
Voltage range 0 to 10 V DC / -10 to 10 V DC
Number of channels Current
5 channels (can switch current / voltage)
Voltage
Resolution Current 0 to 64,000, -7,111 to 32,000 or 0 to 4,095 (20 mA)
Voltage 0 to 64,000 or 0 to 4,095
Conversion time 8 ms or 0.25 ms / 5 channels
Overall accuracy*1,*2 At 25 °C Max. -0.05 to +0.05 % (of full-scale value)
Temperature coefficient Max. -80 to +80 ppm / °C (of full-scale value)
Absolute maximum ratings Voltage: -15 to 15 V Current :30 mA*3
Input filter 1 kHz
Input impedance Current 249 Ω
Voltage Differential 200 kΩ
Insulation system Channel and Internal circuit Transformer (1,000 V AC, 1 minutes)
Between channels Transformer (1,000 V DC, 1 minutes)
External connection Removable type screw terminal block (M3)
External power supply None
External wiring 2-core shield cable (Max. 20 m)
Internal current consumption (5 V DC) Approx. 300 mA
*1 Example) Accuracy at 40 °C is calculated as follows,
0.05 % (accuracy at 25 °C) + 0.008 %/ °C (Temperature coefficient) * 15 °C (difference form 25 °C) = 0.17 %
*2 The accuracy indicates the value after 15 minutes from the power-up. The value may become a lightly higher immediately after
the power-up.
*3 It is the momentary current value that does not destroy the resistance in the module.

Signal
Terminal configuration No. Diagram of Internal circuit
name
[1] (NC)
[2] (NC)
[3] 0-
[1] [4] 1+ 0+
[10] [5] 1JP
[2] 0JP
[11] [6] 2-
[3] 0-
[12] [7] 3+
Internal circuit

[4]
[13] [8] 3JP
[5] [9] 4-
[14]
[6] [10] (NC)
[15] [11] 0+ 4+
[7]
[16] [12] 0JP
[8] 4JP
[17] [13] 1-
[9] [14] 2+ 4-
Screw for [18]
[15] 2JP
fixing
[16] 3-
[17] 4+
[18] 4JP

7 – 18
Chapter 7 Analog I/O Module, Resistance Temperature Detector Input Module, Thermocouple Input Module

Setting switch Support to analog data and digital data


Switch Setup Function
No. 0 to 10 V DC
1, 2 1 2 Input range switching
FA00H(64,000)
OFF OFF 0 to 10 V DC High
resolution
ON OFF -10 to 10 V DC
OFF ON 0 to 22 mA
ON ON 4 to 22 mA 7D00H(32,000)

3, 4 3 4 Moving Average data number 0FFFH(4,095)


12 bit
OFF OFF Not use moving Average 07FFH(2,047) resolution
ON OFF 4 V
OFF ON 16 0 5 10

ON ON 64
-10 to 10 V DC
5 5 Resolution
7D00H(32,000)
OFF High resolution mode (equally 16 bit) High
ON 12 bit mode resolution

6 6 Conversion time 07FFH(2,047)


12 bit
OFF High accuracy, 8 ms (whole channel) 0000H(0) resolution
-10 V
ON High speed,0.25 ms (whole channel) 0 10
7 7 For system Signed 16 bits
F800H(-2,048)
OFF Always OFF (should not turn ON)
8 8 For system
8300H(-32,000)
OFF Always OFF (should not turn ON)
[Setups shown in the white font on black background are initial
factory setting:] 0 to 22 mA
* In this module, be sure to perform the above setup before use.
FA00H(64,000)
Further, be sure to turn off the power in setting up. Otherwise, E346H(58,182) High
the setups are invalid. resolution

0FFFH(4,095)
12 bit
resolution

mA
0 20 22

4 to 22 mA

7D00H(32,000)
6F1CH(28,444) High
resolution

0FFFH(4,095)
12 bit
resolution

0H(0) mA
0 4 20 22
E439H(-7,111)

7 – 19
Chapter 7 Analog I/O Module, Resistance Temperature Detector Input Module, Thermocouple Input Module

(2) EH-AYG4M

Specification EH-AYG4M
Current range 0 to 22 mA / 4 to 22 mA
Voltage range 0 to 10 V DC / -10 to 10 V DC
Number of channels Current
4 channels (can switch current / voltage)
Voltage
Resolution Current 0 to 64,000, -7,111 to 32,000 or 0 to 4,095 (20 mA)
Voltage 0 to 64,000 or 0 to 4,095
Conversion time 0.25 ms / 4 channels
Overall accuracy*1,*2 At 25 °C Max. -0.1 to +0.1 % (of full-scale value)
Temperature coefficient Max. -80 to +80 ppm / °C (of full-scale value)
Absolute maximum ratings Voltage: -15 to 15 V Current :24 mA
Output impedance Current More than 1 k Ω
Voltage Less than 600 Ω
Insulation system Channel and Internal circuit Transformer (1,000 V AC, 1 minutes)
Between channels Transformer (1,000 V DC, 1 minutes)
External connection Removable type screw terminal block (M3)
External power supply None
External wiring 2-core shield cable (Max. 20 m)
Internal current consumption (5 V DC) *3 Max. 730 mA
*1 Example) Accuracy at 40 °C is calculated as follows,
0.1 % (accuracy at 25 °C) + 0.008 %/ °C (Temperature coefficient) * 15 °C (difference form 25 °C) = 0.22 %
*2 The accuracy indicates the value after 15 minutes from the power-up. The value may become a lightly higher immediately after
the power-up.
*3 480 mA ( All channel output 10 V voltage output with 10 kΩ impedance )
600 mA ( All channel output 10 V voltage output with 1 kΩ impedance ) or ( All channel output 11 mA current output )
730 mA ( All channel output 22 mA current output )

Signal
Terminal configuration No. Diagram of Internal circuit
name
[1] (NC)
[2] (NC) V0+
[3] 0- Voltage load
0- 1 k to 1 MΩ
[1] [4] (NC)
[10] [5] 1- Current load
I0+
[2] 0 to 600 Ω
[11] [6] (NC)
[3]
[12] [7] 2-
Internal circuit

[4] [8] (NC) * Voltage output and


[13] current output can
[5] [9] 3-
[14] not use at the same
[6] [10] (NC) time.
[15] [11] V0 +
[7]
[16] [12] I0 +
[8]
[17] [13] V1 + V3+
[9] [14] I1 +
Screw for [18] 3-
fixing [15] V2 +
[16] I2 + I3+
[17] V3 +
[18] I3 +

7 – 20
Chapter 7 Analog I/O Module, Resistance Temperature Detector Input Module, Thermocouple Input Module

Setting switch Support to analog data and digital data


Switch Setup Function
No. 0 to 10 V DC
1, 2 1 2 Output range switching V
10
OFF OFF 0 to 10 V DC 12 bit
ON OFF -10 to 10 V DC resolution
High
OFF ON 0 to 22 mA resolution
ON ON 4 to 22 mA 5
3, 4 3 4 Slew Rate
OFF OFF OFF
ON OFF 0.1 s 0
OFF ON 1s 07FFH 0FFFH 7D00H FA00H
(2,047) (4,095) (32,000) (64,000)
ON ON 10 s
5 5 Resolution -10 to 10 V DC
OFF High resolution mode (equally 16 bit) V
10
ON 12 bit mode
6 OFF For system High
Two's complement
ON Always OFF (should not turn ON) 8300H F800H resolution
(-32,000) (-2,048)
7 7 For system
0 7D00H
OFF Always OFF (should not turn ON) 07FFH
(2,047) (32,000)
8 8 For system
OFF Always OFF (should not turn ON)
-10
Slew Rate function
Slew Rate is a function to change the time of signal change ratio. mA 0 to 22 mA
It defines the time for the full scale value. The image is as follows. 22
20
Example1) 12 bit
1s resolution
In the case that the signal 10 V
setting changes 0 to 5V High
[ Mode setting ] resolution
Output range:0 to 10 V DC 5 V
Slew Rate :1 s

0V 0
0H 0FFFH E346H FA00H
0.5 s (0) (4,095) (58,182) (64,000)

Example2) 10 s
22 mA 4 to 22 mA
In the case that the signal mA
setting changes 4 to 22 22
mA, it is changed to 13 13 mA 20
12 bit
mA before completion of resolution
the setting. High
[ Mode setting ] Same ratio
4 mA resolution
Output range : 4 to 22 mA
Slew Rate : 10 s Set output value 22 mA
4
Set output value 13 mA

0
E439H 0H 0FFFH 6F1CH 7D00H
(-7,111) (0) (4,095) (28,444) (32,000)

[Setups shown in the white font on black background are initial factory setting:]

* In this module, be sure to perform the above setup before use. Further, be sure to turn off the power in setting up. Otherwise, the
setups are invalid.

7 – 21
Chapter 7 Analog I/O Module, Resistance Temperature Detector Input Module, Thermocouple Input Module

7.4 Resistance Temperature Detector Input Module


(1) Resistance temperature detector input
Name and function of each part Type (Weight) EH-PT4 (Approx. 0.18 kg (0.40 lb))
Dimensions (mm (in.))

30 (1.18) 95 (3.74)

Terminal block
cover

100 (3.94)
Setting switch

Terminal block

Name Description
Terminal block This is a terminal block for connecting the I/O signals. The terminal block is removable.
Screws for the terminal block are M3 screws. Use a crimp terminal fitting to the screw diameter.
The maximum thickness of cable is 0.75 mm2. (Use a 0.5 mm2 cable when attaching two crimp terminals to
the same terminal.)
The recommended crimp terminal is shown below.

6 (0.24) (Recommended)

Take great care on handling the terminal


6 (0.24) because it may fall off if the screw is
loose.
Unit: mm (in.)

Terminal block cover This is a cover for attaching to the terminal block.
Setting switch Selects a resistance temperature detector to be used and a measuring temperature range.

Resistance temperature Switch setup


detector
Measuring temperature
range

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Pt100
ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
-20 to 40 °C
Pt100
OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
-50 to 400 °C
Pt1000
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF
-50 to 400 °C
Note that the temperature data are indefinite in the setup except the above.

7 – 22
Chapter 7 Analog I/O Module, Resistance Temperature Detector Input Module, Thermocouple Input Module

Specification EH-PT4
Applicable resistance thermometer Platinum resistance thermometer Pt100 (JIS C 1604-1989) / Pt1000
Temperature conversion data Signed 15 bits
Accuracy*1 -20 to 40 °C
±0.1 °C @25 °C (±0.5 °C @0 to 55 °C)
(Pt100)
-50 to 400 °C
±0.6 °C @25 °C (±3 °C @0 to 55 °C)
(Pt100)
-50 to 400 °C
±0.8 °C @25 °C (±6 °C @0 to 55 °C)
(Pt1000)
Measuring temperature range -20 to 40 °C / -50 to 400 °C (2 mA constant current system)
Input channel 4 channels
Conversion time Approx. 1s / 4 channels
Insulation system Channel and Internal circuit Photo-coupler insulation
Between channels No insulation
External connection Removable type screw terminal block (M3)
External power supply 24 V DC
External wiring Shield cable
Unused terminal processing Temperature conversion data is H7FFF
External wiring resistance Total resistance of 4 channels 400Ωat the maximum
Additional function Linearization
Error detection*2 Temperature conversion data is H7FFF at Max. -51 °C , or Min. 410 °C
Wire breakage processing*2 Temperature conversion data is H7FFF
Internal current consumption Approx. 160 mA
*1 The accuracy indicates the value after 10 minutes from the power-up. The value may become a lightly higher immediately after
the power-up. Also, check the resistance thermometer in advance because there is error in the resistance thermometer.
*2 Indicates the current terminal wiring in open state. When an open error occurs in the voltage terminal wiring, the data is indefinite.

Signal
Terminal configuration No. Diagram of Internal circuit
name
[1] b0
[2] B0
[3] b1 RTD A0 -
+
[1] [4] B1
[10] [5] b2
[2] B0
[11] [6] B2
[3]
[12] [7] b3 b0
Internal circuit

[4] [8] B3
[13] -
[5] [9] 24 V DC+ RTD A3
[14] +
[6] [10] A0
[15] B3
[7] [11] N.C.
[16] [12] A1
[8] b3
[17] [13] N.C.
[9]
[18] [14] A2 24 V DC +
Screw for
fixing [15] N.C.
24 V DC -
[16] A3
[17] N.C.
[18] 24 V DC-

7 – 23
Chapter 7 Analog I/O Module, Resistance Temperature Detector Input Module, Thermocouple Input Module

(2) 6 ch.(3-wire) / 8 ch.(2-wire) resistance temperature detector input


Name and function of each part Model name EH-RTD8(Approx. 0.15 kg
(Weight) (0.33 lb))

Lock button Dimensions


(mm (in.))
LED display

30 (1.18) 95 (3.74)
Mode
Setting I/O cover
DIP switch

100 (3.94)
Terminal

Name Function
Lock button Press this button to dismount. Module can be fixed firmly by a screw of
M4 × 10 mm (0.39 in.).
I/O cover This is the cover attached to the terminal block area.
Terminal The screws for the terminal block are M3 screws. Use a crimp terminal that fits the screw diameter. The
maximum thickness of the cable should be only up to 0.75 mm2. (Use 0.5 mm2 cable when two crimp terminals
are attached to the same terminal.)
The recommended crimp terminal is indicated below.

(Recommended)
6

Handle very carefully since


cable could be detached
6 when screw is loose.

Unit : mm

LED display The status of module and input signal are indicated in this LED.
OK : Green : Normal status
2W : Green : 2-wire mode Off : 3-wire mode
AMB : Green : -40 to 60 ○C mode Off : -200 to 850 ○C mode
HS : Green : High speed conversion time (0.5 s)
Off : Normal conversion time (1.6 s)
0 to 7 : Blinking red : Open-wire or out-of-range is detected in corresponding channel number (0.5 s cycle)

7 – 24
Chapter 7 Analog I/O Module, Resistance Temperature Detector Input Module, Thermocouple Input Module

Name Function
Mode setting These switches are to set wiring type, temperature range, input filter, conversion time, temperature unit,
DIP switch EH-PT4 compatible mode and sensor type.

No. Setting Function


SW1-1 1 Wiring type
OFF 3-wire
ON 2-wire
SW1-2 2 Temperature range
OFF -200 to 850 ○C, ○F conversion: -328 to 1,562 ○F, EH-PT4
compatible:-60 to 410○C
ON -40 to 60○C, ○F conversion: -328 to 1,562 ○F , EH-PT4
compatible: -25 to 45 ○C
SW1-3 3 Input filter
OFF None
ON 16 times moving average
SW1-4 4 Conversion time
OFF 1.6 s
ON 0.5 s
SW1-5 5 Temperature unit
○C
OFF
○F
ON
SW1-6 6 EH-PT4 compatible mode
OFF Disable
ON Enable
SW1-7 7 For system use
OFF Set always OFF
SW1-8 8 For system use
OFF Set always OFF
SW2 9 Sensor type
OFF Pt1000
ON Pt100

7 – 25
Chapter 7 Analog I/O Module, Resistance Temperature Detector Input Module, Thermocouple Input Module

Item Specification
Type EH-RTD8
Supported RTD type PT100 / PT1000 (3-wire or 2-wire)
Number of channel
Selectable by the DIP switch 6 (3-wire) or 8 (2-wire)

Temperature range
-200 to 850 °C or -40 to 60 °C
Selectable by the DIP switch
Resolution ○C ○F
conversion conversion PT4 compatible
Selectable by the DIP switch -200 to 850○C : 0.1 °C -328 to 1562 F : 0.1 F -60 to 410 ○C : 15 bits
○ ○

-40 to 60○C : 0.02 °C - -25 to 45 ○C : 15 bits


Conversion time
1.6 s (all channels) or 0.5 s (all channels)
Selectable by the DIP switch
Accuracy *1 Standard accuracy (25 ○C) Max. ±0.5 °C (measured temperature under 380 °C)
Max. ±0.8 °C (measured temperature over 380 °C)
Temperature coefficient ±0.01% / ○C (FS)*2 (±0.1°C / °C )
Measurement current 0.18 mA
Diagnostic error LED LED blinking at error channel
(Wire breaking detection) Conversion value H7FFF
Input filter
None or moving average 16 times
Selectable by the DIP switch
Warm-up time *3 1 minute
Isolation Channel to internal circuit Photo coupler
Between channels Not isolated
External connector Removable terminal (M3)
Internal current consumption (5 V DC) Max. 300 mA
External power supply None
Wiring Twisted shield cable, wiring resistance Max. 5 Ω (Max. 100m of 22 AWG)
*1 Example : Measuring under 380 °C in ambient temperature 35 °C.(under noise-free environment)
0.5 °C (standard accuracy) + 0.1 °C / °C (temperature coefficient) × 10 (difference to 25 °C) = ±1.5 °C
*2 Full scale is -200 to 850 °C.
*3 It is the time for data to be stable after power on.
Signal name
Terminal layout No. Internal circuit
2-wire 3-wire
[1] A0 A0
[2] A1 b0
[3] B2・B3 B1 A0 A0
[4] A4 A2
[1] [5] A5 b2 B0・1 B0
[10]
[2] [6] B6・B7 B3
[11]
[3] [7] A1 b0
NC A4
[12]
[4] [8] NC b4
Internal circuit

[13]
[5] [9] NC B5 A6
[14]
[6] [10] B0・B1 B0
[15]
[7] [11] A2 A1 B6・7
[16] [12]
[8] A3 b1
[17] [13] B4・B5 B2 A7
[9] A5
Screw for [18] [14] A6 A3
fixing
[15] A7 b3 B5
[16] NC B4
[17] NC A5 b5
[18] NC b5

7 – 26
Chapter 7 Analog I/O Module, Resistance Temperature Detector Input Module, Thermocouple Input Module

7.5 Thermocouple Input Module

Name and function of each part Type (Weight) EH-TC8 (Approx. 0.16 kg (0.35 lb))
Dimensions
(mm (in.))

30 (1.18) 95 (3.74)

Terminal block
cover

100 (3.94)
Setting switch

Terminal block

Name Description
Terminal block This is a terminal block for connecting the I/O signals. The terminal block is removable.
Screws for the terminal block are M3 screws. Use a crimp terminal fitting to the screw diameter.
The maximum thickness of cable is 0.75 mm2. (Use 0.5 mm2 cable when attaching two crimp terminals to
the same terminal.)
The recommended crimp terminal is shown below.

6 (0.24)
(Recommended)

Take great care on handling the terminal


6 (0.24) because it may fall off if the screw is
loose.
Unit: mm (in.)

Terminal block cover This is a cover for attaching to the terminal block.
Select switch Sets the switching of the temperature range, Celsius / Fahrenheit, etc.

Front view of LED Indicating contents

OK
0 1 2 3
OK: Light is on when the module is normal.
4 5 6 7
0 to 7: Light is off when normal LED corresponding to the channel which detected the error flashes.
ANAROG IN EH-AXH8M

7 – 27
Chapter 7 Analog I/O Module, Resistance Temperature Detector Input Module, Thermocouple Input Module

Specification EH-TC8
Applicable thermocouple (switchable by a switch) Conforms to JIS C 1602-1995 Type K, E, J, T, B, R, S, N
Temperature conversion data Signed 15 bits
Measuring temperature range Type Accuracy guaranteed range Input range
and accuracy*1 K -200 to 1,200 °C 0.4 % (FS) -270 to 1,370 °C
E -200 to 900 °C 0.3 % (FS) -270 to 1,000 °C
J -40 to 750 °C 0.3 % (FS) -270 to 1,200 °C
T -200 to 350 °C 0.8 % (FS) -270 to 400 °C
B 600 to 1,700 °C 1.0 % (FS) 0 to 1,820 °C
R 0 to 1,600 °C 1.0 % (FS) -50 to 1,760 °C
S 0 to 1,600 °C 1.0 % (FS) -50 to 1,760 °C
N -200 to 1,200 °C 0.4 % (FS) -270 to 1,300 °C
Cold junction temperature error*2 Max. ±2 °C (Ambient temperature 15 to 35 °C)
Max. ±3 °C (Ambient temperature 0 to 55 °C)
Resolution 0.1 °C / 0.1 °F (K, E, J, T, N) 1.0 °C / 1.0 °F (B, R, S)
Input channel 8 channels
Conversion time 108 / 860 ms
Insulation system Channel and Internal circuit Photo-coupler insulation
Between channels No insulation
External connection Removable type screw terminal block (M3)
External power supply 24 V DC ±10% 100 mA at the maximum
External wiring*3 Shield cable
Internal current consumption Approx. 70 mA
Error detection Input upper limit value over / Input data: H7FFF (LED corresponding to a channel which detected error flashes.)
Breaking wiring detection
Input lower limit value over Input data: H8000
*1 The sum of accuracy of each sensor and the cold junction temperature error is the overall accuracy. Also, there is error in the
thermocouple.
*2 Error is the value after 10 minutes from the power-up. Error may increase slightly because of a quick change in using ambient
temperature.
*3 The external wiring length is possible to 100 m (328 ft.) at the maximum. However, understand in advance that it may change
according to the environment used.

Terminal configuration No. Signal name Diagram of Internal circuit


[1] CH0(+) Use a shield cable.
[2] CH1(+) Thermocouple CH0(+)
[3] CH2(+) CH0(-)
[1] [4] CH3(+)
[10]
[2] [5] CH4(+)
[11] Thermocouple
[6] CH5(+) CH1(+)
[3]
[12] [7] CH6(+) CH1(-)
Internal circuit

[4]
[13] [8] CH7(+)
[5] [9] 24 V DC+
[14]
[6] [10] CH0(-) Thermocouple
CH7(+)
[15] [11] CH1(-)
[7]
CH7(-)
[16] [12] CH2(-)
[8]
[17] [13] CH3(-)
[9] Class D grounding
[14] CH4(-) 24 V DC +
Screw for [18] Internal
[15] CH5(-) power
fixing circuit
[16] CH6(-)
24 V DC -
[17] CH7(-)
[18] 24 V DC-

7 – 28
Chapter 7 Analog I/O Module, Resistance Temperature Detector Input Module, Thermocouple Input Module

Item Switch setup Setting contents


Thermocouple sensor 1 2 3
switching OFF OFF OFF Type K
(Common to all channels) ON OFF OFF Type E
OFF ON OFF Type J
ON ON OFF Type T
OFF OFF ON Type B
ON OFF ON Type R
OFF ON ON Type S
ON ON ON Type N
Celsius (°C) / Fahrenheit (°F) 4
switching OFF Celsius (°C)
(Common to all channels) ON Fahrenheit (°F)
Data updating interval 5
switching OFF 860ms
ON 108ms
Internal cold junction 6
compensation switching OFF Cold junction compensation; Valid
ON Cold junction compensation; Invalid
(System mode) 7
OFF Always OFF (Do not turn ON.)
8
OFF Always OFF (Do not turn ON.)
[Setups shown in the white font on black background are initial factory setting:]
* In this module, be sure to perform the above setups. And, be sure to turn off the power in setting up. Otherwise, the setups are
invalid.

Reference
If the internal cold junction compensation is invalidated and a highly accurate ice-bus is installed outside, the
temperature can be measured accurately on higher level.

7 – 29
Chapter 7 Analog I/O Module, Resistance Temperature Detector Input Module, Thermocouple Input Module

MEMO

7 – 30
Chapter 8 Positioning and Counter Module
8.1 Single-axis Positioning Module (Discontinued)

Name and function of each part Type (Weight) EH-POS (Approx. 0.17 kg (0.37 lb))
Dimensions
(mm (in.))

30 (1.18) 95 (3.74)
Reset switch

Positioner connector

100 (3.94)
I/O connector

DIP switch

Name Description
Reset switch The module is reset if this switch is pressed.
Positioner connector This is used for connecting the positioner.
I/O connector This is a connector (20 pins) for the pulse output and the external control input.
Applicable connector
Manufacturer: Sumitomo 3M
Connecting system: 10120-3000VE (Soldering type )
Shell: 10320-52F0-008 (or equivalents)
DIP switch Switches the choice of pulse output method (CW / CCW or CK / Direction switching), output logic
(positive / negative logic), and whether external input signal is in or not.
Turn off the power and remove the module out of the base to change the setting.

Purpose Applied switch Bit 1 Bit 2 Explanation


Choice of OFF OFF Clock pulse / Direction signal output (Positive logic)
ON
pulse output method OFF ON Clock pulse / Direction signal output (Negative logic)
Bit 1-2 1 2 3 4 5 6 ON OFF CW / CCW pulse output (Positive logic)
ON ON CW / CCW pulse output (Negative logic)

Purpose Applied switch Explanation


Positioning complete external input ON OFF COIN signal
signal
Choice of (COIN) is in or not Bit 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 ON No COIN signal
ON OFF +0.RUN signal
+ Direction overrun external input signal
Choice of (+0.RUN) is in or not Bit 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 ON No +0.RUN
ON OFF -0.RUN signal
- Direction overrun external input signal
Choice of (-0.RUN) is in or not Bit 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 ON No -0.RUN signal
* Always use Bit 3 with OFF

8–1
Chapter 8 Positioning and Counter Module

Specifications
Item Specification
Number of control axes 1 axis
Highest frequency 400 kpulse/s
Positioning data Capacity 256 points
Setting procedure 1. Sequence program
2. Positioner (Note, a positioner is optional.)
Positioning Method 1. Absolute system
2. Absolute system + Increment system
3. Increment system
Positioning instruction 1. Pulse specifying
2. μm specifying
3. inch specifying
4. degree specifying
Speed instruction Automatic, manual, and homing
6.25 pulse/s to 400 kpulse/s
μ m/s、inch/s、degree/s input function
Speed stage 10 stages
Acceleration and Trapezoid acceleration and deceleration
deceleration system S-curve acceleration and deceleration (3-stage acceleration and deceleration)
Acceleration and 1 to 65,535 ms
deceleration time
Backlash 0 to 255 pulse
High and low limit setting +2,147,483,647 to -2,147,483,648 pulse
Pulse output method 1. Pulse chain (CW / CCW)
2. Clock + direction signal (CK / Direction)
(DIP switch No.1 and No.2 set the choice of pulse output system and the
switching of each positive and negative logic.)
Pulse output procedure 1. Open collector output (Photo-coupler insulation)
2. Line driver output (Photo-coupler insulation)
Homing function 1. Free home position
2. Low speed homing
3. High speed homing 1
4. High speed homing 2
5. Absolute value encoder homing
Teaching Possible
Manual (JOG) operation Pulse output by manual input signal
Operation when CPU has stopped Operation is possible via I/O set or using the positioner
Absolute value encoder input Supports to Σ series / Σ II series by Yasukawa Electric Co. and P series by
SANYO electric Co.
Mounting position Basic base and Expansion base
Number of units to be mounted simultaneously Unlimited within power supply capacity of the power module
(continued on the following page)
*1 When the CPU is stopped during operation, the motor decelerates and stops.
*2 The maximum travel per one movement is 2,147,483,647 pulses. If the operation is performed exceeding the
maximum travel, the motor decelerates and stops at the maximum travel position.

8–2
Chapter 8 Positioning and Counter Module

Specifications (continued from the preceding page)


Item Specification
Output Pulse chain (CW / CCW) output 1. Open collector output photo-coupler insulation
Clock + Direction signal (30 V DC at the maximum, 30 mA resistive load)
(CK / Direction) pulse output 2. Line driver output photo-coupler insulation (5 V DC)
Maximum leak current Max. 100 µ A
Maximum voltage drop at ON 0.8 V at the maximum (at output current 30 mA)
Input Input voltage 10.8 to 30 V DC
Input impedance Approx. 2.2 kΩ
Input current Approx. 10 mA (24 V DC)
Operating Minimum ON voltage 9V
voltage Maximum OFF voltage 3.6 V
Input lag ON  OFF Max. 1 ms
OFF  ON Max. 1 ms
Polarity Only encoder signal input uses the plus common inside the unit, and other inputs do
not specify polarity.
Insulation system Photo-coupler
A) Specifications of Positioner connector (CN1): conforms to RS-422
Terminal configuration No. Signal Signal name Diagram of Internal circuit
1 Do - Driver output -
Internal
2 Do + Driver output + circuit
3 Ri - Receiver input - -12 V 8
GND 7
4 Ri + Receiver input + 6
1

Positioner
5V
5 5 V DC + +5V 5
......

6 0V GND 2
8 1
7 0V GND 5V
4
8 12 V DC - -12 V 3

GND

B) Specifications of I/O connector (CN2)


Terminal configuration No. Signal Signal name Diagram of Internal circuit
1 5 V DC + Pulse output power
2 0V supply
3 CW Open collector pulse
4 CCW output
5 CW + Internal circuit
6 CW - Line driver pulse 5V
1

7 CCW + output 3, 4

1 11 8 CCW - 5V
5, 7
9 C+ 6, 8
Encoder C phase
......

......

10 C- 2

11 PS - 9, 11
Encoder position
12 PS + signal
10 20 13 COIN Positioning complete 10, 12
13 to 19
14 PROG Home position LS
15 + 0.RUN + Overrun
20
16 - 0.RUN - Overrun
17 MODE - SEL Control mode switch
18 M - CW Manual CW
19 M - CCW Manual CCW
20 24 V DC + Control power supply

8–3
Chapter 8 Positioning and Counter Module

8.2 High Speed Counter Module

Name and function of each part Type (Weight) EH-CU (0.16 kg (0.35 lb))
EH-CU: 2-ch High speed counter, EH-CUE: 1-ch High speed counter EH-CUE (0.16 kg (0.35 lb))
Dimensions
(mm (in.))

30 (1.18) 95 (3.74)
Reset switch
RESET

100 (3.94)
Wiring connector

NCT

EH-CU

Setting DIP switch

Name Description
Reset switch The module is reset if this switch is pressed.
Wiring connector This is a connector with 30 pins (15×2 lines) for connecting the external wiring.
Note) In EH-CU, common to 2 channels
Applicable connector on the module side
Manufacturer: Hirose Electric Co.
Type: HIF3BA-30PA-2.54DS (30 pins male)
Applicable connector on the wiring side
Manufacturer: Hirose Electric Co.
Type: HIF3BA-30D-2.54C (30 pins connector)
HIF3-2226SCC (connector pin)
HIF3-TB2226HC (crimp tool)
HIF3--30CV (connector cover)
Setting DIP switch Performs each initial setting of EH-CU and EH-CUE.
Turn off the power and remove the module from the base to change the setting.

LED name
External view of LED LED name Details Color
part
PW Lighted when the power is ON and the module operates regularly. Green
1A 1B 1M PW ER Lighted when the hardware error of the module occurs. Red
2A 2B 2M ER 1A Lighted depending on ON / OFF of the A-phase input signal of Channel 1. Green
0 1 2 3 1B Lighted depending on ON / OFF of the B-phase input signal of Chnnale1. Green
COUNTER EH-CU 1M Lighted depending on ON / OFF of the marker input signal of Channel 1. Green
EH-CU (2-ch type) 2A Lighted depending on ON / OFF of the A-phase input signal of Channel 2. Green
2B Lighted depending on ON / OFF of the B-phase input signal of Channel 2. Green
1A 1B 1M PW
2M Lighted depending on ON / OFF of the marker input signal of Channel 2. Green
ER
0 Lighted depending on ON / OFF of Y0 output terminal. Green
0 1
1 Lighted depending on ON / OFF of Y1 output terminal. Green
COUNTER EH-CUE
2 Lighted depending on ON / OFF of Y2 output terminal. Green
EH-CUE (1-ch type) 3 Lighted depending on ON / OFF of Y3 output terminal. Green
* “ER” LED lights up for an instance if the reset switch is pressed down. That is no error.

8–4
Chapter 8 Positioning and Counter Module

Purpose Applied switch Bit1 Bit 2 Explanation


Select the counter mode Bit 1, 2 OFF OFF 2-phase counter (100 kHz at the maximum)
(Common between OFF ON 1-phase counter (CW, CCW)
channels) ON OFF 1-phase counter (CK, UP / DOWN)
ON
ON ON 2-phase multiplied by 4 counter (25 kHz at the maximum)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Purpose Applied switch Explanation


Select the marker polarity ON OFF Channel 1 Detects the marker at the input OFF edge.
Bit 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ON Channel 1 Detects the marker at the input ON edge.
ON OFF Channel 2 Detects the marker at the input OFF edge.
Bit 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ON Channel 2 Detects the marker at the input ON edge.
Select counting operation ON OFF Channel 1 Stops counting while the CPU module stops.
during STOP
Bit 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ON Channel 1 Keeps counting while the CPU module stops.
ON OFF Channel 2 Stops counting while the CPU module stops.
Bit 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ON Channel 2 Keeps counting while the CPU module stops.
Select normal counter / ON OFF Channel 1 Normal counter
ring counter
Bit 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ON Channel 1 Ring counter
ON OFF Channel 2 Normal counter
Bit 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ON Channel 2 Ring counter
Select the test mode ON OFF Normal operation
Bit 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ON Test mode (Program for checking is started up.)
* Always use Bit 10 with OFF.

8–5
Chapter 8 Positioning and Counter Module

Specifications
Item Specification
Type EH-CU EH-CUE
Number of channels 2 channels 1 channel
Maximum number of counts 32 bits (0 to 4,294,967,295)
Maximum frequency 100 k Hz (25 k Hz at multiplied by 4)
Count mode Select by setting of DIP switch. (EH-CU is common to both channels.)
2-phase, 1-phase (CW / CCW, CK, U / D), 2-phase multiplied by 4
Differential input current Min. 4 mA
Differential input voltage 12 to 24 V DC
Minimum ON voltage 10 V DC
Maximum OFF voltage 4 V DC
Insulation system Photo-coupler
Number of input A:A, CW, CK Phase difference of each channel (A - B) during 2-phase counting
points B:B, CCW, U / D +45 ° to +125 ° when up, -45 ° to -125 ° when down
3 points / CH
M: Marker (z)
Minimum counter pulse width ON: Min. 4 µs, OFF: Min. 4 µs
Minimum marker pulse width Min. 10 µs (detected at ON edge)
External wiring method 30-pin batch connector for both channels 30-pin connector
External wiring Wired with twisted pair cables and batch shielded cables
Output voltage 12 / 24 V DC (Max. 30 V DC)
Load current Max. 20 mA / point
Output method Open collector output
Minimum load current 1 mA
Output delay time ON → OFF Max. 1 ms
OFF → ON Max. 1 ms
Voltage down at ON Max. 1.5 V
Number of external output points 4 points / module 2 points / module
External terminal of output destination
can be specified for each channel
Normal counter Current value = Set value 1, or Current value > Set value 1
Ring counter Current value = Set value 2
Leak current Max. 0.5 mA
Polarity (-) common within the module
External power supply 12 / 24 V DC (Max. 30 V DC)
Insulation system Photo-coupler
Mounting position Basic base, Expansion base (cannot mount on the remote base)
Number of units to be mounted Unlimited within power supply capacity of the power module.
simultaneously

8–6
Chapter 8 Positioning and Counter Module

Specifications of I/O terminal


Terminal
EH-CU No. CH2 No. CH1 Meaning of signal
configuration
Connects to a 12 to 24 V DC power supply at
16 Vin A 1 Vin A
using voltage input.
17 A (+) 2 A (+) Connects (+) polarity at using differential input.
Phase A
Connects an open collector signal at using
18 A (-) 3 A (-) voltage input.
Connects (-) polarity at using differential input.
RESET
Connects to a 12 to 24 V DC power supply at
19 Vin B 4 Vin B using voltage input.
CH2 CH1
20 B (+) 5 B (+) Connects (+) polarity at using differential input.
Phase B
Connects an open collector signal at using
21 B (-) 6 B (-) voltage input.
16 1
Connects (-) polarity at using differential input.
Connects to a 12 to 24 V DC power supply at
22 Vin M 7 Vin M
using voltage input.
CN1
23 M (+) 8 M (+) Connects (+) polarity at using differential input.
Marker
Connects an open collector signal at using
24 M (-) 9 M (-) voltage input.
30 15 Connects (-) polarity at using differential input.
25 to 27 N.C. 10 to 12 N.C. Connect nothing.
EH-CU
28 Y2 13 Y0 Coincidence output. Connects to the other input.

29 Y3 14 Y1 Output Coincidence output. Connects to the other input.


(-) common for coincidence common.
30 Com2 15 Com1
Commons 1 and 2 are independent.
* Pin No. defined in EH-CU does not accord with pin No. defined by connector maker.

Terminal
EH-CUE No. CH2 No. CH1 Meaning of signal
configuration
Connects to a 12 to 24 V DC power supply at
16 N.C. 1 Vin A using voltage input.
17 N.C. 2 A (+) Connects (+) polarity at using differential input.
Phase A
Connects an open collector signal at using
18 N.C. 3 A (-) voltage input.
Connects (-) polarity at using differential input.
RESET
Connects to a 12 to 24 V DC power supply at
19 N.C. 4 Vin B
using voltage input.
CH2 CH1
20 N.C. 5 B (+) Connects (+) polarity at using differential input.
Phase B
Connects an open collector signal at using
21 N.C. 6 B (-) voltage input.
16 1
Connects (-) polarity at using differential input.
Connects to a 12 to 24 V DC power supply at
22 N.C. 7 Vin M using voltage input.
CN1
23 N.C. 8 M (+) Connects (+) polarity at using differential input.
Marker
Connects an open collector signal at using
24 N.C. 9 M (-) voltage input.
30 15 Connects (-) polarity at using differential input.
25 to 27 N.C. 10 to 12 N.C. Connect nothing.
EH-CUE
28 N.C. 13 Y0 Coincidence output. Connects to the other input.

29 N.C. 14 Y1 Output Coincidence output. Connects to the other input.

30 N.C. 15 Com1 (-) common for coincidence output.

* Pin No. defined in EH-CUE does not accord with pin No. defined by the connector maker.

8–7
Chapter 8 Positioning and Counter Module

MEMO

8–8
Chapter 9 Communication and Network Module
9.1 CPU Link Module
Coaxial cable type
Name and function of each part Type (Weight) EH-LNK (Approx. 0.15 kg (0.33 lb))
Dimension
(mm (in.))

Station No. switch (× 10)


30 (1.18) 95 (3.74)

Station No. switch (× 1)

Error indication clear switch

100 (3.94)
Reset switch

Transmitting coaxial cable connector

Receiving coaxial cable connector

Name Description
Station No. switch (× 10) This switch determines the link station No.
The setting of this switch is validated when the power is turned on or the reset switch is
pressed. The setting range is between 00 and 63.
Example) Sets the station No. to 18.

10-digit … 1

Station No. switch (× 1) Station No. 18

1-digit … 8

- Setting of 64 or higher triggers an out-of-range error for the station No.


- Duplication of station No. triggers a duplication error for the station No.
- If there is no station No.00 (master station) in the link system, it cannot work normally.
Error indication clear switch Clears the indication displayed on ERR LED.
(ERR LED will light up again if the error factor is not resolved.)
Reset switch* The module is reset if this switch is pressed.
Transmitting coaxial cable Transmits data from the own station.
connector (TXD) Connect to RXD on the next station using a coaxial cable.
Receiving coaxial cable connector Receives data from other station.
(RXD) Connect to TXD on the next station using a coaxial cable.
* The CPU module will detect a “Link Module Error (error code: 74H)” if the reset switch is pressed. Please resolve the
error of the CPU module after making sure that the link module is operating normally.

LED name
Front view of LED part LED Details Color
TxD Flashes when data is received. Yellow green
CPU LINK EH-LNK
RxD Flashes when data is transmitted. Yellow green
RUN TxD
RUN Lights up when the link module is operating properly. Yellow green
ERR RxD
Normal state : OFF
ERR Error (data link is possible) : Flashing (in 1 s interval) Red
Error (data link is impossible) : Flashing (in 0.5 s interval), turn on

9–1
Chapter 9 Communication and Network Module

Optical cable type


Name and function of each part EH-OLNK
(Approx. 0.15 kg (0.33 lb))
Type EH-OLNKG
(Weight) (Approx.0.15 kg (0.33 lb))
EH-OLNKE
(Approx. 0.15 kg (0.33 lb))
Station No. switch (× 10) Dimensions
(mm (in.))

Station No. switch (× 1)

Error indication clear switch


Reset switch 30 (1.18) 95 (3.74)

100 (3.94)
Connector
for 5V DC power supply

Receiving optical cable connector


TXD
RXD

[Module base] Transmitting optical cable connector

Name Description
Station No. switch (× 10) This switch determines the link station No.
The setting of this switch is validated when the power is turned on or the reset switch is
pressed. The setting range is between 00 and 63.
Example) Sets the station No. to 18.

10-digit … 1
Station No. switch (× 1) Station No. 18

1-digit… 8

- Setting of 64 or higher triggers an out-of-range error for the station No.


- Duplication of the station No. trigger a duplication error for the station No.
- If there is no station No.00 (master station) in the link system, it cannot operate normally.
Error indication clear switch Clears the indication displayed on ERR LED.
(ERR LED will light up again if the error factor is not resolved.)
Reset switch* The module is reset if this switch is pressed.
Connector for 5V DC power Supply 5 V DC from another power source if the link system needs to work while this module
supply is not powered.
Receiving optical cable connector Receives data from other station.
(RXD) Connect to TXD on the next station by an optical cable.
Transmitting optical cable Transmits data from other station.
connector (TXD) Connect to RXD on the next station by an optical cable.
* If the reset switch is pressed, the CPU module will detect a “Link Module Error (error code: 74H)”. Please resolve the
error of the CPU module after making sure that the link module is operating normally.

9–2
Chapter 9 Communication and Network Module

LED name
Front view of LED part LED Details Color
Yellow
TxD Flashes when data is received.
green
CPU LINK EH-OLNK Yellow
RxD Flashes when data is transmitted.
RUN TxD green
ERR RxD Yellow
RUN Lights up when the link module is operating properly.
green
Normal state : OFF
ERR Error (data link is possible) : Flashing (in 1s interval) Red
Error (data link is impossible) : Flashing (in 0.5 s interval), turn on

Specifications (CPU link module (coaxial, optical))


Item Specification
Number of connected link modules 64 units at the maximum per link system
Number of link points 1,024 words per loop (2,048 words per 2 loops)*1
Data delivery system Common data area system
Transmit / Receive distinction on Parameter setup from peripheral devices
Functional Specification

data area allocation


Station No. specifying Specifies 0 to 63 by a rotary switch.
Transmission speed 1.0 Mbps
Transmission method Half-duplex serial transmission, frame synchronization
Communication method Token passing
Modulation method Base band
Refresh time At 64 stations connection and 1024 words transfer; Approx. 390 ms
Error check CRC, overrun check, timeout, open circuit parameter error
(Dual specifying of station No., overlap of link area, etc.)
Self-diagnosis System ROM / RAM check, watchdog timer check, transmission loop back check
Transmission channel form Loop type
Cable length Between stations Maximum 500 m (EH-LNK), Maximum 1,000 m (EH-OLNK), Maximum 2,000 m
(EH-OLNKG,E)
Total extension Maximum 1,000 m (EH-LNK), Maximum 15,000 m (EH-OLNK,EH-OLNKG,E)
Transmission channel Specification

Error station processing Bypass system (coaxial), Bypass system (optical; only when supplying 5 V DC from
another power source)
Recommended cable (EH-LNK) Coaxial cable with shield (equivalent to the 5D-2V with shield)
Recommended connector Link module side: equivalent to 413631-1 (by AMP)
(EH-LNK)
Recommended EH-OLNK CA7103- 1 M- 2 L 3 1 Hitachi Hybrid Network Co., Ltd.
cable and 1 : cable length, 2 : cable type, 3 : core number
connector
(Refer to the EH-OLNKG, CA9103S- 1 M-AL11 Hitachi Hybrid Network Co., Ltd.
instruction of EH-OLNKE CA9003S- 1 M-AL12
each module for CA9103S- 1 M- 2 B
more details.) 1 : cable length, 2 : core number
For the recommended cable of EH-OLNKE, add “-625” at the end of above types.
Mounting position Slot 0 to 7 on the basic base
*1 Power failure memory protection is not possible.

9–3
Chapter 9 Communication and Network Module

9.2 PROFIBUS-DP Master Module 2

Name and function of each part Model name EH-RMP2


Weight 0.16 kg
Lock button
(0.35 lb)
Current consumption 0.78 A
(5 V DC)
Dimensions (mm (in.))
LED display

USB communication connector


30 (1.18) 95 (3.74)
Rotary switch
Reset switch
Communication connector

100 (3.94)
Side DIP switch

Name Function Remarks


Lock button Press this button to dismount.
Module can be fixed firmly by a screw of M4 × 10mm (0.39in).
Communication connector D-sub 9-pin connector for communication cable.
USB communication Type-B USB connector for configuration.
connector
LED display The status of module is displayed on this LED.
Rotary switch This is a rotary switch to set network input / output sizes.
Reset switch The module can be reset by pressing this switch when the module Please do not
detected an error.
press and hold
At the time the RDY LED is turned off immediately after the press, it
will be reset. the reset switch.
Side DIP switch This is a switch to set an operation mode.

Outline of communication Symbol Indication Details


connector

D-sub 9 pin connector.


PROFIBUS
Terminal layouts are shown below.
Pin No. Details

1 1 NC
6
2 NC
Communication
PROFIBUS 3 B-Line
connector 4 NC
9 5 GND
5 6 +5 V DC
7 NC
8 A-Line
9 NC

9–4
Chapter 9 Communication and Network Module

Description of LED display


LED
LED Indication Details
name

Display EH-RMP2 hardware status.

State Details

Off Hardware error


Hardware status
RDY Power supply error
(Green / Red)
Flash in green or red Initialization

Lit in red Hardware error

Lit in green No error

Display EH-RMP2 system status.

State Details

Off Power supply error

Flash in red Internal error

Lit in red WDT error


System status
STATUS Fifth-flash in green Side DIP switch setting error
(Green / Red)
Forth-flash in green Link parameter error

PROFIBUS EH-RMP2 Triple-flash in green Configuration data error

RDY RUN ERR


Double-flash in green CPU module error

Single-flash in green Initialization


STATUS REM
Lit in green No error

Display PROFIBUS network status.

State Details
Network status
RUN Off No communication established
(Green)
Blinking Under communication establishment

On Communication established

Display PROFIBUS error status.

State Details

Error status Off Communication established


ERR
(Red) Blinking Slave units at least one are not

established

On All slave units are not established

Operating mode
REM No use. It is always off.
(Green)

9–5
Chapter 9 Communication and Network Module

The state of LED is indicated below.


100ms 100ms

On
Blinking
Off

On
500ms 500ms
Single-flash
Off

On
200ms 200ms 200ms 600ms 200ms
Double-flash
Off

On
200ms 200ms 200ms 200ms 200ms 600ms
Triple-flash
Off

1 2 n
On
200ms 200ms 200ms 200ms 600ms
n times-flash
Off

Description of Rotary switch


Rotary switch Symbol Meaning Details of setting
MODE Input / Output The input / output sizes of PROFIBUS network are set by rotary switch.
Sizes Value Network size Input size Output size
0 Variable size 512 words max 512 words max
1 64W / 64W fixed 64 words 64 words
2 128W / 128W fixed 128 words 128 words
3 256W / 256W fixed 256 words 256 words
7 8
6 9 4 512W / 512W fixed 512 words 512 words
MODE 5 0
4 1 5
3 2
6
[Default setting: 0]
7 Variable size 512 words max 512 words max
8
9

In case of the compatible mode, the input / output sizes of PROFIBUS are
fixed at 256words / 256words in spite of setting of this switch.

Please set rotary switch to 0 if you use auto addressing function with use of the SYCON.net. If you map each slave
I/O address including offset address, please set rotary switch value 1, 2, 3 or 4. When actual input / output sizes
exceed setting sizes, EH-RMP2 detects error.

9–6
Chapter 9 Communication and Network Module

Description of Side DIP switch

 Downward
position is ON

Downward position is ON side in case of side view like


left figure.

No. Setting description Details


1 No use Please keep off.
4 3 2 1
ON

[Default setting: OFF]


2 EH-RMP compatible OFF : Standard mode
mode ON : Compatible mode
4 3 2 1
ON

[Default setting: OFF]

3,4 Output hold selecting When the CPU is switched from RUN to STOP position, it can select output status.
4 3 2 1
Bit4 Bit3 Position Output hold function selection
ON

4 3 2 1 Clear mode.
[Default setting: OFF] When the CPU is switched from RUN to STOP position,
ON

OFF OFF
EH-RMP2 outputs the zero data to PROFIBUS slave. But
the link area (%MW) is not cleared.
4 3 2 1 Freeze mode.
OFF ON When the CPU is switched from RUN to STOP position,
ON

EH-RMP2 holds output data that is last data received.


4 3 2 1 Copy mode.
ON OFF When the CPU is switched from RUN to STOP position,
ON

EH-RMP2 continues to copy in the link area (%MW).


4 3 2 1

ON ON Don’t care.
ON

9–7
Chapter 9 Communication and Network Module

Performance specification
Specifications

Item EH-RMP2 EH-RMP

Standard mode Compatible mode* (Existing model)

Communication protocol PROFIBUS-DP V0

Range of node address 0 to 125: Setting by configuration tool

Maximum I/O size Input: 512 words, output: 512 words Input: 256 words, output: 256 words

(Setting by rotary switch)

Connector D-sub 9 pin

Topology BUS

Communication cable PROFIBUS cable

Segment length, 9.6 kbps : 1,200 m


Communication specifications

Transmit speed 19.2 kbps : 1,200 m

93.75 kbps : 1,200 m

187.5 kbps : 1,000 m

500 kbps : 400 m

1,500 kbps : 200 m

3 Mbps : 100 m

6 Mbps : 100 m

12 Mbps : 100 m

Maximum connectable
125 slaves
number of slaves

Output hold Supported (Clear mode, Freeze mode, Copy mode)

Termination Not built-in Built-in

Configuration tool SYCON.net SyCon


Functional specifications

Number of modules 8 modules / CPU

Self-check WDT check


WDT check
System memory check

Error indication LED


*: Compatible mode is available on SOFTWARE VER. 0114 or newer.

9–8
Chapter 9 Communication and Network Module

9.3 PROFIBUS-DP Slave Controller 2

Name and function of each part Model name EH-IOCP2


Weight 0.14 kg
(0.31 lb)
Lock button Current consumption 0.35 A
(5 V DC)
Dimensions (mm (in.))

LED display

45 (1.77) 95 (3.74)
Node address switch

Reset switch

100 (3.94)
Communication connector

Bottom DIP switch

Name Function Remarks


Lock button Press this button to dismount.
Module can be fixed firmly by a screw of M4 × 10mm (0.39 in).
Communication connector D-sub 9-pin connector for communication cable.
LED display The status of module is displayed on this LED.
Node address switch This is a switch to set the node address.
Reset switch The module can be reset by pressing this switch when the module
detected an error.
Bottom DIP switch This is a switch to set an operation mode (the output hold, etc.).

Outline of communication Symbol Indication Details


connector

D-sub 9 pin connector.

Terminal layouts are shown below.

PROFIBUS Pin No. Details

1 NC

2 NC
1
6 3 B-Line
Communication
PROFIBUS
connector 4 NC

9 5 GND
5
6 +5 V DC

7 NC

8 A-Line

9 NC

9–9
Chapter 9 Communication and Network Module

Description of LED display


LED
Outline Indication Details
name

On : indicates that the 5 V DC power is supplied.

Off : indicates that the 5 V DC power is not supplied or reset switch is on.

State Details

Power supply Off Hardware error


POW
(Green) Power supply error

n times flash I/O modules failure (n is modules

failure point)

On No error

Display the output hold function status.

Output hold State Details


PROFIBUS EH-IOCP2 HOLD
(Green) Off Disable the output hold function
POW HOLD
BF
On Enable the output hold function

Display PROFIBUS error status or EH-IOCP2 hardware status.

State Details

Off No error

Blinking Communication timeout

Error Single-flash Configration error


BF
(Red) I/O modules failure

Double-flash Mount not support modules

Mount at out of area

Triple-flash I/O data size over or zero.

On Internal error

The state of LED is indicated below.

On
200 ms 200 ms
Blinking
Off

On
200 ms 1,000 ms 200 ms
Single-flash
Off

On
200 ms 200 ms 200 ms 1,000 ms 200 ms
Double-flash
Off

On
200 ms 200 ms 200 ms 200 ms 200 ms 1,000 ms
Triple-flash
Off

1 time 2 time 3 time


On
200 ms 200 ms 200 ms 200 ms 1,000 ms
N times-flash
Off

9 – 10
Chapter 9 Communication and Network Module

Description of Rotary switch


Rotary switch Symbol Meaning Details of setting

7 8 ×10 Station No. The station No. of PROFIBUS network is set from 00 to 99.
6 9
×10 5 0 (Tens place) (00 to 99) The tens place set by upper rotary switch. The ones place set by
4 1
3 2 lower rotary switch.
ADR
7 8
6 9 ×1
×1 5 0
4 1 (Ones place)
3 2

[Default setting : 00]

Description of Bottom DIP switch

 Downward
position is ON

Downward position is ON side in case of bottom view


like left figure.

No. Setting description Details


1 Output hold function When the PROFIBUS master’s communication stopped, it is selected whether the output data
selecting from the master is held or not. (Hold means the last data received properly is fixed.)
Output hold function may be changed action depending on master unit. Please read master’s
manual and check the combination master unit and EH-IOCP2, before using output hold function
of EH-IOCP2.
ON

1 2 3 4
Bit1 Position Output hold function selection
[Default setting: OFF]
Disable the output hold function (Turn off all output data
OFF
ON

1 2 3 4 from the master at the communication stopped.)


Enable the output hold function (At the communication
ON stopped, output data from master is held with last data
ON

1 2 3 4
received properly.)
2 EH-IOCP compatible mode It can select whether the EH-IOCP2 operates as standard mode or compatible mode.
selecting Bit2 Position EH-IOCP compatible mode selection

OFF Standard mode (EH-IOCP2)


ON

1 2 3 4
ON

1 2 3 4

[Default setting: OFF] ON Compatible mode (EH-IOCP)


ON

1 2 3 4

3 Data swap function It can select whether it performs byte swap by a word unit.
selecting Bit3 Position Data swap function selection

OFF Disable the data swap function


ON

1 2 3 4
ON

1 2 3 4

[Default setting: OFF] ON Enable the data swap function


ON

1 2 3 4

4 No use Please keep off.


ON

1 2 3 4

[Default setting: OFF]

9 – 11
Chapter 9 Communication and Network Module

Performance specification
Specifications

EH-IOCP2
Item EH-IOCP
Standard mode EH-IOCP
(Existing model)
compatible mode

Communication PROFIBUS-DP V0

protocol

Range of node address 0 to 99 : Setting by rotary switch

Maximum I/O size Input : 244 bytes, Output : 244 bytes*1

Connector D-sub 9 pin

Topology BUS

Communication cable PROFIBUS cable


Communication specifications

Segment length, 9.6 kbps : 1,200 m

Transmit speed 19.2 kbps : 1,200 m

93.75 kbps : 1,200 m

187.5 kbps : 1,000 m

500 kbps : 400 m

1,500 kbps : 200 m

3 Mbps : 100 m

6 Mbps : 100 m

12 Mbps : 100 m

Output hold Supported*2

Data swap Supported Not supported

Termination Not built-in Built-in

GSD file HITA0E64.GSD HITA049D.GSD

Support base unit EH-BS3 / 5 / 8 / 3A / 5A /


EH-BS3 / 5 / 8 / 3A / 5A / 6A / 8A
6A / 8A / 11A / 8R

Number of modules 22 modules / EH-IOCP2 16 modules / EH-IOCP(2)


Functional specifications

Number of I/O points 1,408 points: Digital I/O


1,024 points: Digital I/O, 128 ch : Analog I/O
176 ch : Analog I/O*2

Expansion unit 1 (use by EH-IOC, EH-IOCH and EH-IOCH2)

Refresh time 500 µs 5 ms

Self-check WDT check


WDT check
System memory check

Error indication LED


*1 Each I/O size of EH-IOCP2 is expanded from 128 bytes to 244 bytes by software version 0014 or newer.
*2 The output hold function of EH-IOCP2 is supported by software version 0014 or newer.

9 – 12
Chapter 9 Communication and Network Module

9.4 EtherCAT Slave Controller

Name and function of each part Model name EH-IOCA


1] Lock button Weight 0.14 kg
Dimensions (mm (in.))

2] LED display

45 95
3] Node address switch

4] Reset switch

5] Communication connector

100
(IN)

6] Communication connector
(OUT)

7] Refresh cycle setting switch

No. Name Function Remarks


1] Lock button Press this button to dismount.

Module can be fixed firmly by a screw of M4 × 10mm (0.39in).
2] LED display The status of module is displayed on this LED. -
3] Node address switch This is a switch to set the node address. -
4] Reset switch The module can be reset by pressing this switch when error such as the

module abnormal occurred.
5] Communication connector This is a connector to connect a cable for communication.

(IN)
6] Communication connector This is a connector to connect a cable for communication.

(OUT)
7] Refresh cycle setting switch This is a switch to set the refresh cycle of the mounted module. Supported on
HARDWARE REV. 02

9 – 13
Chapter 9 Communication and Network Module

Description of LED display


LED
Outline Indication Details
name
Power supply On : indicates that the 5V DC power is supplied.
POW
(Green) Off : indicates that the 5V DC power is not supplied or reset switch is on.

Display an EtherCAT communication status.

State Details

Status Off Init


RUN
(Green) Blinking PRE-OPERATIONAL

Single-flash SAFE-OPERATIONAL

On OPERATIONAL

Display EtherCAT error status or EH-IOCA hardware status.

HARDWARE REV. 02 or newer


EtherCAT EH-IOCA
POW RUN State Details
ERR
Off No error

Blinking Configuration error

Double-flash Application watchdog timeout

Error
ERR
(Red) HARDWARE REV. 01
State Details
Off No error
Blinking Configuration error
Single-flash EtherCAT synchronism failure
Communication data failure
Double-flash Application watchdog timeout
Flickering Boot error
On PDI watchdog timeout

The state of LED is indicated below.

ON
200ms 200ms
Blinking
OFF

ON
200ms 1000ms 200ms
Single-flash
OFF

ON
200ms 200ms 200ms 1000ms 200ms
Double-flash
OFF

50ms

ON
Flickering
OFF

9 – 14
Chapter 9 Communication and Network Module

Description of Rotary switch


Rotary switch Symbol Meaning Details of setting

HARDWARE REV. 02 or newer ×10 Station No. The Station No. of EtherCAT® network is set from 1 to 99.
7 8 The tens place set by upper node address switch. The ones place
6 9 (Tens place) (1 to 99)
×10 5 0
4 1 set by lower node address switch.
3 2
ID
7 8
6 9
×1 5 0
4 1
3 2

HARDWARE REV. 01
×1
7 8
6 9 (Ones place)
×10 5 0
4 1
3 2
ADR
7 8
6 9
×1 5 0
4 1
3 2

[Default setting : 00]


Node address of EH-IOCA is set by node address method of EtherCAT® master unit. If EtherCAT® master use fixed
node address method, node address switch of EH-IOCA is valid. If EtherCAT® master use logic node address method or
auto increment address method, node address switch of EH-IOCA is invalid. If EtherCAT® master use logic nodes
address method or auto increment address method, please set the node address switch to “00”.

Description of refresh cycle setting switch


Switch Details of setting
No.2 OFF
No.1 OFF Set the refresh cycle of the mounted module to 500 μs fixed. It is HARDWARE REV.01
compatibility mode.
2
1
ON
[Default setting: OFF]
The refresh cycle of the mounted module is automatically selected according to the size of the

mounting module.
No.2 OFF
No.1 ON Total number of words of the mounting module refresh cycle

2 1 to 22 words 62.5 µs
1 23 to 44 words 125 µs
ON
45 to 88 words 250 µs

89 to 176 words 500 µs

9 – 15
Chapter 9 Communication and Network Module

Description of Connector
HARDWARE REV. 02 or newer
Connector Symbol Indication Details
IN Communication RJ45 8-pin connector. Terminal layouts are shown below.
connector
L/A Pin No. Details
8 1 Send data + (TD+)
2 Send data - (TD-)
IN 3 Receive data + (RD+)
1 4 NC
100M OUT 5 NC
6 Receive data - (RD-)
L/A 7 NC
8 8 NC
OUT
1 Link status LED LINK LED light up after LINK establishment of EtherCAT®
100M L/A
(Green) communication, and it blinks during operation.
100M Communication 100M LED light up when LINK is established at 100 Mbps.
Speed LED
(Orange)
HARDWARE REV. 01
Connector Symbol Indication Details
IN Communication RJ45 8-pin connector. Terminal layouts are shown below.
connector
LINK Pin No. Details
1
1 Send data + (TD+)
IN 2 Send data - (TD-)
3 Receive data + (RD+)
8
ACT 4 NC
OUT 5 NC
6 Receive data - (RD-)
LINK
1 7 NC
8 NC
OUT
8
ACT LINK LINK LED LINK LED light up if the communication device are connected
(Green) with a cable.
ACT ACT LED ACT LED is flashing during operation.
(Orange)

Recommended cable
Recommended cable of EH-IOCA is shown below. But if EH-IOCA is used in noisy environment, we recommend
cables with double, aluminum tape and braided shielding.
Item Details
Twisted pair cable 100BASE-TX (CAT 5 or higher)
STP cable
RJ45 connector CAT 5 or higher, Shielded

The maximum cable length between connected nodes is 100 m. Note that some cables do not guarantee 100 m. In
general, if the conductors are strand wire, the transmission performance will be lower than solid wire and the
operation at 100 m distance cannot be guaranteed. Confirm details with the cable manufacturer.

9 – 16
Chapter 9 Communication and Network Module

Performance specification
Item Specifications Remarks
Communication protocol EtherCAT® protocol
Transmit modulation Base band
method
Transmit speed 100 Mbps
Physical layer 100 BASE-TX (IEEE802.3)
Communication specifications

Connector RJ45 (IN, OUT)


Topology Daisy-chain
Cable redundancy Support *1 Supported on HARDWARE
REV.02
Recommended cable CAT5 or higher, STP cable
Maximum segment length 100 m
Communication cycle 200 µs or over *2
Node address range 1 to 99 : Fixed node address
1 to 65,535 : Auto increment address
Process data Fixed PDO mapping
Mailbox Support
Cycle mode Free Run mode (asynchronous)
Output hold Support
Support base unit EH-BS3A/5A/6A/8A/11A/8R
Number of modules 22 modules / EH-IOCA
Functional specifications

Number of I/O points 1,408 points : Digital I/O


176 ch : Analog I/O
Expansion unit 1
Refresh cycle Auto (62.5 / 125 / 250 / 500 µs), Fix (500 µs) Supported on HARDWARE
REV.02
Self-check WDT check
Error indication LED
Supported ESI file HITACHI_IES_EH-IOCA_2_0.xml Refer below “Combination
of EH-IOCA and ESI file”
Current consumption 400 mA
*1 When using the cable redundancy function, The EtherCAT® master also needs to support the cable redundancy
function.
*2 The communication cycle is dependent on the specification of the EtherCAT Master.

Combination of EH-IOCA and ESI file


EH-IOCA EH-IOCA
HARDWARE REV.01 HARDWARE REV.02
ESI file (REV.01)
Possible Impossible
EH_IOCA.xml
ESI file (REV.02)
Possible Possible
HITACHI_IES_EH-IOCA_2_0.xml

Caution
When using EH-IOCA of HARDWARE REV.02 please use HITACHI_IES_EH-IOCA_2_0.xml for the ESI file. If
EH-IOCA.xml corresponding to HARDWARE REV.01 is used, the system may malfunction.

9 – 17
Chapter 9 Communication and Network Module

9.5 FL-net Module 3

Name and function of each part Model name EH-FLN3


Lock button Weight 0.12 kg
(0.26 lb)
Dimensions (mm (in.))

LED display

30 (1.18) 95 (3.74)
Reset switch

100 (3.94)
Communication connector

LINK / ACT

100M

Name Function Remarks


Lock button Press this button to dismount.
Module can be fixed firmly by a screw of M4 × 10mm (0.39 in).
Communication connector RJ45 type connector.
LINK / ACT LED is turned on green at the time of cable connection and blinking
during communicating.
100M LED is turned on orange at 100 Mbps, and is turned off at 10 Mbps.
LED display The status of module is displayed on this LED.
Reset switch The module can be reset by pressing this switch when the module detected an error.

9 – 18
Chapter 9 Communication and Network Module

Description of LED display


LED
LED Indication Details
name

Display the power(5 V DC) status.


Power supply State Details
POW
(Green) Off Power off
Lit in green Power on

Display the entry state of FL-net network.


Network status State Details
LNK
(Green) Off Not participation in network
Lit in green Participation in network

Display transmission status.


Transmit State Details
TxD
(Green) Off Not sending data
FL-net EH-FLN3
Lit in green Sending data
POW TxD
LNK RxD
PER HER
Display receiving status.
Receive State Details
RxD
(Green) Off Not receiving data
Lit in green Receiving data

Display parameter status.


Parameter error State Details
PER
(Red) Off No error
Lit in red Parameter error

Display hardware status.


Hardware error State Details
HER
(Red) Off No error
Lit in red Hardware error

9 – 19
Chapter 9 Communication and Network Module

Description of Side DIP switch

 Downward
Position is ON

Downward position is ON side in case of side


view like left figure.

No. Setting description Details


1 Communication mode Sets up the communication speed.
selecting Bit1 Position Communication mode
4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
ON

OFF 10M / 100 Mbps Auto negotiation


ON

[Default setting: OFF] 4 3 2 1

ON 10 Mbps fixed
ON

2 No use Please keep off.


4 3 2 1
ON

[Default setting: OFF]

3 No use Please keep off.


4 3 2 1
ON

[Default setting: OFF]

4 No use Please keep off.


4 3 2 1
ON

[Default setting: OFF]

9 – 20
Chapter 9 Communication and Network Module

Performance specification
Item Specifications
Communication protocol FL-net Ver.3.01 class 1
Communication specifications

10M / 100Mbps
Baud rate
Auto Negotiation
Modulation Baseband transmission
Electrical interface Conforms to IEEE802.3 (Conforms to CSMA / CD)
Communication protocol UDP/IP FA link protocol
10 / 100BASE-T
Communication cable
CAT5(UTP)
Maximum transmission distance 100m
Maximum number of nodes 254 nodes
Number of modules 2modules / CPU, Mounting position is the slot 0 to 7
Functional specifications

Cyclic Area1:8 kbits


transmission Area2:8 kwords
Message transmission Not supported
System memory check
Self-check
WDT check

9 – 21
Chapter 9 Communication and Network Module

9.6 Serial Interface Module

Name and function of each part Type EH-SIO


Approx. 0.13 kg
[1] Lock button Weight
(0.29 lb)
Dimensions
[2] State display LED (mm (in.))

[3] Reset switch


30 (1.18) 95 (3.74)
[4] Connector for Port1
(RS-232C or RS-422/485)

100 (3.94)
[5] Connector for Port2
(RS-232C)
Selectable
[6] Connector for Port2
(RS-422/485)

[7] Communication setting switch

No. Name Function Remark


[1] Lock button When dismounting the module from a base unit, press this
button and lift up the module. The module can be fixed
firmly by a screw (M4, 10 mm (0.39 in.)).
[2] State display LED This LED displays the status of module.
[3] Reset switch Resets when the module is abnormal.
[4] Connector RS-232C Port Used to connect the RS-232C I/F. Selection with
Communication
for Port 1 RS-422/485 Port * Used to connect the RS-422 I/F or RS-485 I/F. Setting Switch
[5] Connector RS-232C Port Used to connect the RS-232C I/F. Selection with
Communication
[6] for Port2 RS-422/485 Port Used to connect the RS-422 I/F or RS-485 I/F. Setting Switch
[7] Communication setting switch The communication specification is configured by this
switch. Please set according to connected devices after the
power off and dismounting from a base unit.
* Communication interface of Port 1 is selectable in hardware Rev. 10 or newer. The hardware before Rev. 10 supports RS-232C
only.

Display of LED
Appearance LED Contents of display Details Color
LNK Simple Data Link Mode *1 Lighting when the simple data link mode setting Green
Hard Rev. 04 or before Lighting when MPU error (Serious failure)
WDE Watchdog Timer Error Red
Port 1, Port 2 combined use
LNK WDE MDE CDE Lighting when module error (Serious failure)
SD1 RD1 SD2 RD2 MDE Module Error Red
Port 1, Port 2 combined use
MB1 HP1 MB2 HP2 Lighting when the command error and so on
MS1 MS2 422 CDE Command Error Red
(Minor failure) Port 1, Port 2 combined use
SERIAL I/O EH-SIO SD1 Send Data Flickering when sending data (Port1) Green
RD1 Receive Data Flickering when receiving data (Port1) Green
MB1 During Modbus Mode Lighting on Modbus mode setting (Port1) Green
HP1 During Hi-Protocol Mode *1 Lighting on Hi-Protocol mode setting (Port1) Green
Hard Rev. 10 or newer MS1 During Modbus Master Mode Lighting on Modbus Master mode setting (Port1) Green
LNK WDE MDE CDE
4221 Select RS-422 / 485 I/F*2 Lighting when select the RS-422 / 485 I/F (Port1) Green
SD1 RD1 SD2 RD2
SD2 Send Data Flickering when sending data (Port2) Green
MB1 HP1 MB2 HP2
RD2 Receive Data Flickering when receiving data (Port2) Green
MS1 4221 MS2 4222
MB2 During Modbus Mode Lighting on Modbus mode setting (Port2) Green
HP2 During Hi-Protocol Mode *1 Lighting on Hi-Protocol mode setting (Port2) Green
SERIAL I/O EH-SIO
MS2 During Modbus Master Mode Lighting on Modbus Master mode setting (Port2) Green
4222 Select RS-422 / 485 I/F*2 Lighting when select the RS-422 / 485 I/F (Port2) Green
*1 “Hi-Protocol” and “Simple data link” mode are supported by software ver. 2.0 or newer.
*2 Added / Changed from hardware Rev. 10.

9 – 22
Chapter 9 Communication and Network Module

Communication setup switch


There are 3 pieces of communication setting switches mounted. DIP Sw1, 4 are the setting switch for port 1 and DIP
Sw2 is for port 2. (DIP Sw4 is the switch which added from hardware Rev. 10.) In case of set up, please remove the
module from the base unit.

ON ON ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW4 SW1 SW2

DIP Sw4
No. Setup contents Details
1 Communication I/F DIP Sw4 is used for select of communication I/F of Port 1. (RS-232C or RS-422 / 485)
for Port 1 (RS-422 or 485 is switched by external wiring.)
ON DIP Sw4 Communication I/F for Port1
ON RS-422 / RS-485 Port
OFF RS-232C Port

* DIP Sw4 is added from hardware Rev. 10. Communication I/F of Port 1 can be selected by this switch.

DIP Sw1
No. Setup contents Details
1 Transmission Bit 1, 2, 3, 4 are used for setting of transmission speed of Port 1.
speed ON Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Transmission speed
OFF OFF OFF OFF Ineffective
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF OFF OFF ON 300 bps
OFF OFF ON OFF 600 bps
OFF OFF ON ON 1,200 bps
OFF ON OFF OFF 2,400 bps
OFF ON OFF ON 4,800 bps
OFF ON ON OFF 9,600 bps
OFF ON ON ON 19,200 bps
ON OFF OFF OFF 38,400 bps
ON OFF OFF ON 57,600 bps
ON OFF ON OFF Ineffective
ON OFF ON ON
ON ON OFF OFF
ON ON OFF ON
ON ON ON OFF
ON ON ON ON
2 Transmission format Bit 5, 6, 7 are used for setting of transmission format configuration of Port 1.
configuration ON Transmission format configuration
Bit5 Bit6 Bit7
Data length Stop bit Kind of parity bit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF OFF OFF 7 2 Even
OFF OFF ON 7 2 Odd
OFF ON OFF 7 1 Even
OFF ON ON 7 1 Odd
ON OFF OFF 8 2 None
ON OFF ON 8 1 None
ON ON OFF 8 1 Even
ON ON ON 8 1 Odd

* The system uses DIP switch 1 (Bit 8). Do not turn on it.

9 – 23
Chapter 9 Communication and Network Module

DIP Sw2
No. Setup contents Details
1 Transmission Bit 1, 2, 3, 4 are used for setting of transmission speed of Port 2.
speed ON Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Transmission speed
OFF OFF OFF OFF Ineffective
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF OFF OFF ON 300 bps
OFF OFF ON OFF 600 bps
OFF OFF ON ON 1,200 bps
OFF ON OFF OFF 2,400 bps
OFF ON OFF ON 4,800 bps
OFF ON ON OFF 9,600 bps
OFF ON ON ON 19,200 bps
ON OFF OFF OFF 38,400 bps
ON OFF OFF ON 57,600 bps
ON OFF ON OFF Ineffective
ON OFF ON ON
ON ON OFF OFF
ON ON OFF ON
ON ON ON OFF
ON ON ON ON
2 Transmission format Bit 5, 6, 7 are used for setting of transmission format configuration of Port 2.
configuration ON Transmission format configuration
Bit5 Bit6 Bit7
Data length Stop bit Kind of parity bit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF OFF OFF 7 2 Even
OFF OFF ON 7 2 Odd
OFF ON OFF 7 1 Even
OFF ON ON 7 1 Odd
ON OFF OFF 8 2 None
ON OFF ON 8 1 None
ON ON OFF 8 1 Even
ON ON ON 8 1 Odd

3 Communication I/F for Bit 8 is used for select of communication I/F of Port 2. (RS-232C or RS-422 / 485)
Port 2 (RS-422 or 485 is switched by external wiring.)
ON Bit8 Communication I/F for Port2
ON RS-422 / RS-485 Port
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF RS-232C Port

9 – 24
Chapter 9 Communication and Network Module

RS-232C connector
Terminal layout No. Symbol Signal name Diagram of Internal circuit
1 SG Ground for signal
1) SG
1
2 CD Carrier detect
2) CD

....
3 CS Clear to Send

Micro processor
3) CS
8 4 ER Communication enabled signal 4) ER
1 5 SD Data sent from EH-SIO 5) SD
6) RD
....

6 RD Data received by EH-SIO


7) DR
8 7 DR Peripheral units connected signal
8) RS
8 RS Transmission request signal

RS-422 / 485 connector


Port 1
Terminal layout No. Symbol Signal name Diagram of Internal circuit
1 SG Ground for signal
1
1) SG
2 N.C. (Not used)
....

3 N.C. (Not used)

Micro Processor
4) SD+
8 4 SD+ Send data + +
5) SD-
5 SD- Send data –
7) RD+
6 RD- Receive data – +
6) RD-
7 RD+ Receive data +

8 N.C. (Not used)

Port 2
Terminal layout No. Symbol Signal name Diagram of Internal circuit
1 SD + Send data + 1) SD+
+

1 2 SD – Send data – 2) SD–
Micro Processor

3) RD+
3 RD + Receive data + +
....


4) RD–
4 RD – Receive data –
110Ω 5) TERM
6 5 TERM Built-in terminator
6) SG
6 SG Ground for signal

9 – 25
Chapter 9 Communication and Network Module

Functional specifications
Item Specification
Mounting position Basic base and Expansion base (cannot mount on Remote base)
Number of units to be mounted at Unlimited within the range of power supply capacity of the power module.
once (The operation in the Modbus slave mode is 8 units at the maximum.)
Number of occupied I/O points 128 points
I/O assignment Word 4W/4W
Supporting communication mode No protocol, Modbus mater (RTU / ASCII*1), Modbus slave (RTU)
*1 Modbus master ASCII is available with CPU firmware version 3.5.13.40 or newer.

Communication specifications
Item Specification
Port 1 Selectable from RS-232C, RS-422, and RS-485*2
Interface
Port 2 Selectable from RS-232C, RS-422, and RS-485
Transmission speed Selectable from 300, 600, 1,200, 2,400, 4,800, 9,600, 19,200, 38,400, and 57,600 bps
Transmission system Bit serial system (Transmitted from the lowest bit of transmission signal)
Synchronization Asynchronous

Start bit
Parity bit
(Including, None / Even, Odd)
Transmission character
Stop bit (1 or 2)
configuration Transmission data(7 or 8)
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

Input buffer 1,024 bytes / port


Output buffer 1,024 bytes / port
Error control Overrun error, framing error, parity error, input buffer full, message error, timeout error
Connection mode 1:1
RS-232C Transmission
15 m (49.37 ft.) (Maximum)
port distance
Connector RJ-45 connector
Connection mode 1 : N (N : 32 units at the maximum)
RS-422 / 485 Transmission
500 m (548.61yd.) (Maximum)
port distance
Connector Packaged connector (BL3.5/6F by Weidmuller)
*2 Communication interface of Port 1 is selectable in hardware Rev. 10 or newer. The hardware before Rev. 10
supports RS-232C only.

9 – 26
Chapter 9 Communication and Network Module

9.7 DeviceNet Master Module 2

Name and function of each part Model EH-RMD2


Weight 0.12 kg
1] Lock button (0.26 lb)
Dimensions (mm (in.) )

2] LED display

3] USB communication connector


30 (1.18) 95 (3.74)

4] Auto configuration switch

5] Reset switch

100 (3.94)
6] Mode setting switch

7] Communication
connector

8] Mode setting switch (Side)

No. Name Function


1] Lock button Press this button to dismount.
Module can be fixed firmly by a screw of M4 × 10mm (0.39in).
2] LED display The status of module is displayed on this LED.
3] USB communication connector Type-B USB connector for EH-RMD2 CONFIGURATOR.
4] Auto configuration switch Auto configuration switch.
5] Reset switch Reset switch when module error occurs.
6] Mode setting switch Master / slave and communication speed setting switch.
7] Communication connector Open plug connector for DeviceNetTM communication.
8] Mode setting switch (Side) Node address / remote size setting switch.

Description of Connection
Connector Symbol Indication Details
Open plug connector.
Terminal layouts are shown below.

5 Pin No. Signal Wire color

4 5 V+ Red
Communication 4 CAN_H White
DeviceNetTM
3 connector
3 Drain Bare wire
2 2 CAN_L Blue
1 1 GND Black

9 – 27
Chapter 9 Communication and Network Module

Description of LED display

LED
LED Indication Details
name
Indicating power and communication status.
State Details
Power supply
POW Lighting - Power ON (DeviceNetTM communication in progress)
(Green)
Blinking - Power ON (DeviceNetTM communication stopped)
Off - Power OFF
Indicating the module status.
State Details
Lighting - No error
Module status
Blinking - No configuration (Master setting)
(Green)
- Scan Interval error (Master setting)
- I/O size is not set (Slave setting)
Off - Power OFF
Indicating the module status.
State Details
MS Lighting - EH-RMD2 memory error
- EH-RMD2 watch dog timer error
- DeviceNet TM power off (Internal 5V DC power supply error)
Module status Blinking - Before starting EH-RMD2
(Red) - Mode setting switch setting error
- CPU module error
- LINK parameter error (LINK setting)
- I/O configuration error
DeviceNet EH-RMD2
(REMOTE2 / REMOTE (RMM) setting)
POW RUN
Off - Power OFF
REM
NS MS
Indicating the network status.
State Details
TM
Lighting - DeviceNet communication connection
Network status
establishment
(Green)
Blinking - DeviceNetTM communication connection
not establishment

NS Off - DeviceNetTM power off


Indicating the network status.
State Details
Network status Lighting - MAC ID duplication
(Red) - Busoff error
Blinking - Network error (Connection time out)
Off - No error
Indicating the mode.
State Details
Mode
REM Lighting - REMOTE2 mode
(Green)
Blinking - REMOTE (RMM) mode
Off - LINK mode
Indicating the RUN / IDLE mode.
RUN / IDLE
State Details
RUN Mode
Lighting - RUN mode ( Synchronize with CPU module RUN)
(Green)
Blinking - IDLE mode

9 – 28
Chapter 9 Communication and Network Module

Description of mode setting switch


No. Setting description Details
Master / Slave Master / Slave setting
SLAVE Position Setting
SLAVE 4
REMOTE 3 SLAVE 4
REMOTE 3
DR1 2 OFF DR1 2 Master
1 DR0 1 DR0 1
ON ON

[Default setting : OFF] SLAVE 4


REMOTE 3
ON DR1 2 Slave
DR0 1
ON

LINK / REMOTE LINK / REMOTE setting


Set LINK mode when using with HX-CPU.
SLAVE 4 Side mode
REMOTE 3 REMOTE setting Position Setting
DR1 2 switch 7
DR0 1
SLAVE 4

ON
ON
REMOTE 3
[Default setting : OFF] OFF OFF DR1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LINK
DR0 1
ON Side mode setting switch
2
SLAVE 4

ON
REMOTE 3
ON OFF DR1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
REMOTE2
DR0 1
ON Side mode setting switch

SLAVE 4

ON
REMOTE 3 REMOTE
ON ON DR1 2
DR0 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 (RMM)
ON Side mode setting switch

Communication speed Communication speed setting

DR0 DR1 Position Setting


SLAVE 4
REMOTE 3 SLAVE 4
DR1 2 REMOTE 3
OFF OFF DR1 2 125kbps
DR0 1 DR0 1
ON ON

[Default setting : OFF] SLAVE 4


REMOTE 3
ON OFF DR1 2 250kbps
DR0 1
3 ON

SLAVE 4
REMOTE 3
OFF ON DR1 2 500kbps
DR0 1
ON

Please do not set.


Can not
ON ON
be set.

9 – 29
Chapter 9 Communication and Network Module

Description of side mode setting switch


No. Setting description Details
MAC ID Please set the MAC ID with reference to the example below.
1 2 3 4 5 6 Position Setting

ON

ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MAC_ID : 0
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
[Default setting : OFF]

ON
ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MAC_ID :1

ON
OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF MAC_ID :2
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON
OFF ON ON ON ON ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MAC_ID :62

ON
ON ON ON ON ON ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MAC_ID :63

REMOTE I/O size REMOTE2 / REMOTE(RMM) setting.


Set OFF when using with HX-CPU.
ON

2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

[Default setting : OFF]

System setting Please keep off.


ON

3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

[Default setting : OFF]

Replacing from EH-RMD


There are some differences between EH-RMD2 and EH-RMD.

No. Item EH-RMD2 EH-RMD

1 Configuration-tool EH-RMD2 CONFIGURATOR EH-RMDCFG

USB cable
2 Configuration-cable (Same as USB cable for Serial cable
EHV-CPU)
Number of connections
3 1/node 3/node
(At the same time)

It is possible to replace from EH-RMD to EH-RMD2 by the following procedure.


(1) Import EH-RMD configuration file to EH-RMD2 CONFIGURATOR.
(2) Set the mode setting switch to the same setting as EH-RMD.
(Master / Slave setting, LINK / REMOTE setting, communication speed)
(3) Download from EH-RMD2 CONFIGURATOR to EH-RMD2.

9 – 30
Chapter 9 Communication and Network Module

Specification
Specifications
Item
EH-RMD2
Communication protocol Conform to DeviceNetTM Release 2.0
(1) Polling I/O connection
(2) Bit Strobe I/O connection
Supported connection (3) Cyclic I/O connection
(4) Change of State I/O connection
(5) Explicit Message I/O connection
Number of connections
Communication specifications

1/node
(At the same time)
Range of node address 0 to 63
Maximum I/O size Input : 256 words, output : 256 words (LINK)
Connector DeviceNetTM open plug connector
Multi drop connection,
Topology
Multi branch connection using by Device tap
Communication cable DeviceNetTM cable
Network length Each drop Total drop
Baud rates
Thick cable Thin cable line length line length
Maximum Segment length,
Transmit speed 500kbps 100m 100m 6m 39m
250kbps 250m 100m 6m 78m
125kbps 500m 100m 6m 156m
Maximum number of slave
63 slaves
connections
Termination Not Built-in
EH-CPU316A / 516 / 548, EHV-CPU08 / 16 / 32 / 64 / 128
EHV-CPU1025 / EHV-CPU1102
Support CPU module *1
HX-CP1S08 / HX-CP1H16 / HX-CP1S08M / HX-CP1H16M /
HXC-CP1H16
I/O assignment LINK / REMOTE2 / REMOTE (RMM)
EH-CPU316A LINK : 2 modules/CPU
EH-CPU5** LINK : 2 modules/CPU
Number REMOTE2 : 4 modules/CPU
Functional specifications

of EHV-CPU*** LINK : 8 modules/CPU


modules REMOTE2 : 4 modules/CPU
REMOTE (RMM) : 4 modules/CPU
HX-CP**** LINK : 8 modules/CPU
Slave mode Supported
Software reset Supported
WDT check
Self-check
System memory check
Current consumption Approx. 300mA
Standard compliant *2 CE
Configurator *3 EH-RMD2 CONFIGURATOR
Windows 7
Configurator Support OS Windows 8.1
Windows 10
Configurator EH-RMD2
connection module (USB port)
*1 Supported I/O assignment of HX-CPU series is LINK only.
*2 UL is not supported. Contact your local supplier for further information.

9 – 31
Chapter 9 Communication and Network Module

9.8 DeviceNet Slave Controller 2

Name and function of each part Model EH-IOCD2


1] Lock button Weight 0.14 kg
(0.31 lb)
Dimensions (mm (in.))

3] LED display

4] Node address switch 45 (1.77) 95 (3.74)

5] Reset switch

100 (3.94)
2] Communication connector

6] Bottom DIP switch

No. Name Function


1] Lock button Press this button to dismount.
Module can be fixed firmly by a screw of M4 × 10mm (0.39in).
2] Communication connector Open plug connector for communication cable.
3] LED display The status of module is displayed on this LED.
4] Node address switch This is a switch to set the node address.
Node address range is 00 to 63.
5] Reset switch The module can be reset by pressing this switch when the module detected an error.
6] Bottom DIP switch This is a switch to set an operation mode (the output hold, etc.).

Description of Connector
Connector Symbol Indication Details
Open plug connector.
DeviceNet Terminal layouts are shown below.

5
Pin No. Signal Wire color
4 5 V+ Red
Communication 4 CAN_H White
DeviceNet
3 connector
3 Drain Bare wire
2
2 CAN_L Blue
1 1 GND Black

9 – 32
Chapter 9 Communication and Network Module

Description of Rotary switch


Rotary switch Symbol Meaning Details of setting

7 8 ×10 Station No. The station No. of DeviceNet network is set from 00 to 63.
6 9
×10 5 0 (Tens place) (00 to 63) The tens place set by upper rotary switch. The ones place set by
4 1
3 2 lower rotary switch.
ADR
7 8 Node address range is 00 to 63. If you set higher than 63,
6 9 ×1
×1 5 0 EH-IOCD2 operates as node address 63.
4 1 (Ones place)
3 2

[Default setting: 00]

Description of LED display


LED
LED Indication Details
name
On: indicates that the DC5V power is supplied.

Off: indicates that the DC5V power is not supplied or reset switch is on.

State Details

Power supply Off Hardware error


POW
(Green) Power supply error

n times flash I/O modules failure

(n is modules failure point)

On No error
DeviceNet EH-IOCD2
POW HOLD Display the output hold function status.
NS MS
Output hold State Details
HOLD
(Green) Off Disable the output hold function

On Enable the output hold function

DeviceNet

NS status Indicates DeviceNet network status.

(Green / Red )

EH-IOCD2

MS status Indicates EH-IOCD2 status.

(Green / Red )

9 – 33
Chapter 9 Communication and Network Module

Description of Bottom DIP switch


 Downward
position is ON

Downward position is ON side in case of bottom view


like left figure.

No. Setting description Details


1 Output hold function When the communication timeout error occurred, it is selected whether the output data from the
selecting master is held or not. (Hold means the last data received properly is fixed.)
Output hold function may be changed action depending on master unit. Please read master’s
manual and check the combination master unit and EH-IOCD2, before using output hold function
of EH-IOCD2.
ON

1 2 3 4
Bit1 Position Output hold function selection
[Default setting: OFF]
Disable the output hold function (Turn off all output data
OFF
ON 1 2 3 4 from the master at the communication error.)
Enable the output hold function (At the communication
ON error, output data from master is held with last data
ON

1 2 3 4
received properly.)
2 EH-IOCD compatible It can select whether the EH-IOCD2 operates as standard mode or compatible mode.
mode selecting Bit2 Position EH-IOCD compatible mode selection

OFF Standard mode (EH-IOCD2)


ON
ON

1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4

[Default setting: OFF] ON Compatible mode (EH-IOCD)


ON

1 2 3 4

3 No use Please keep off.


ON

1 2 3 4

[Default setting: OFF]


4 No use Please keep off.
ON

1 2 3 4

[Default setting: OFF]

Differences between EH-IOCD and EH-IOCD2


There are some differences between EH-IOCD2 and EH-IOCD.
(1) Method of node address setting.
EH-IOCD: DIP switch.
EH-IOCD2: Rotary switch.
(2) Method of communication baud rate.
EH-IOCD: DIP switch.
EH-IOCD2: It is not necessary by using auto baud rate function.
EH-IOCD2 supports compatible mode to replace EH-IOCD without re-configuration of DeviceNetTM master.

Caution
When EH-IOCD2 is in compatible mode, EDS file and the number of I/O modules are different from standard
mode.

9 – 34
Chapter 9 Communication and Network Module

Performance specification
Specifications
Item EH-IOCD2
Standard mode EH-IOCD compatible mode
Communication protocol Conform to DeviceNet Release 2.0
Supported connection (1) Polling I/O connection
(2) Bit Strobe I/O connection
(3) Cyclic I/O connection
(4) Change of State I/O connection
(5) Explicit Message I/O connection
Range of node address 0 to 63 : Setting by rotary switch
Communication specifications

Maximum I/O size Input : 256 words, output : 256 words


Connector DeviceNet open plug connector
Topology Multi drop connection,
Multi brunch connection using by Device tap
Communication cable DeviceNet cable
Maximum Segment length, Network length Total drop
Each drop
Transmit speed Baud rates line
line length
Thick cable Thin cable length
500kbps 100m 100m 6m 39m
250kbps 250m 100m 6m 78m
125kbps 500m 100m 6m 156m
Communication
Auto baud rate function
baud rate setting
Output hold Supported
Termination Not built-in
EDS file EH-IOCD2.EDS EH-IOC~1.EDS
Support base unit
EH-BS3/5/8/3A/5A/6A/
EH-BS3/5/8/3A/5A/6A/8A
8A/11A/8R
Functional specifications

Number of modules 22 modules / EH-IOCD2 16 modules / EH-IOCD(2)


Number of I/O points 1,408 points: Digital I/O 1,024 points: Digital I/O
176 ch.: Analog I/O 128 ch.: Analog I/O
Expansion unit 1 (use by EH-IOC, EH-IOCH and EH-IOCH2)
Refresh time 500 µs
Self-check WDT check
Error indication LED
Current consumption Approx. 250 mA
Standard compliant CE, C-Tick*1
*1 UL is not supported. Contact your local supplier for further information.

Caution
EH-IOCD2 supports digital I/O modules, Analog I/O modules (incl. RTD and Thermocouple), counter
modules and positioning modules only. Note that the others are not supported. Do not use
unsupported modules with EH-IOCD2.

For information on the EDS files for EH-IOCD2, contact your local supplier.

9 – 35
Chapter 9 Communication and Network Module

MEMO

9 – 36
Chapter 10 Accessories
10.1 Dummy Module

Name and function of each part Type (Weight) EH-DUM (Approx. 0.06 kg (0.132 lb))
Dimensions
(mm (in.))

30 (1.18) 95 (3.74)

100 (3.94)

Function This module is used for protecting the un-mounted slot.

10.2 Expansion Cable

Name and function of each part Type EH-CB05A / 10A / 20A


Weight Approx. 0.21 (0.46) / 0.24 (0.53) / 0.30
kg (0.66 lb)
Length 0.5 (1.64) / 1.0 (3.28) / 2.0 m (6.56 ft.)

Function Connects to the expansion cable connector of the base unit and to the connector of the I/O controller.
There is no directivity in the cable. Either connector can be connected to the base side.

10 – 1
Chapter 10 Accessories

10.3 Terminal Block for 32/64 Points I/O Module

Name and function of each part Type HPX7DS-40V6 (Approx. 0.22 kg


(Weight) (0.49 lb))
Terminal block Dimensions
(mm (in.))

40 (1.57) 52 (2.05)

Connector
Mounting hole × 2
Connector for mounting DIN rail

Item Description
Terminal block This is a terminal block for connecting the external wiring.
Connector This is a connector with 40 pins = 20 × 2 lines for connecting each module.
These holes are used when attaching the terminal unit to a panel.
Mounting hole
Use M4×25 mm screws.
Connector for mounting DIN rail This is used when mounting attaching the terminal unit to the DIN rail.

Terminal configuration
Terminal block Connector

(21)
(21) ① ①
(1)
(1)
(22)
(2) ② ②
(23)
(3) ③ ③
(24)
(4) ④ ④
(25)
(5) ⑤ ⑤
(26)
(6) ⑥ ⑥
(27)
① ① (7) ⑦ ⑦
(28)
(8) ⑧ ⑧
(29)
(9) ⑨ ⑨
(30)
(10) ⑩ ⑩
(31)
(11) ⑪ ⑪
(32)
(12) ⑫ ⑫
(33)
⑳ ⑳ (13) ⑬ ⑬
(34)
(14) ⑭ ⑭
(35)
(15) ⑮ ⑮
(36)
(16) ⑯ ⑯
(37)
(17) ⑰ ⑰
(38)
(18) ⑱ ⑱
(39)
(19) ⑲ ⑲
(40)
(20) (40)
(20) ⑳ ⑳

10 – 2
Chapter 10 Accessories

I/O and Terminal block


EH-XD32 EH-YT32 / YTP32
I/O No. Terminal I/O No. Terminal I/O No. Terminal I/O No. Terminal
(Signal) block No. (Signal) block No. (Signal) block No. (Signal) block No.
Bit00 1 Bit16 21 Bit00 1 Bit16 21
Bit01 2 Bit17 22 Bit01 2 Bit17 22
Bit02 3 Bit18 23 Bit02 3 Bit18 23
Bit03 4 Bit19 24 Bit03 4 Bit19 24
Bit04 5 Bit20 25 Bit04 5 Bit20 25
Bit05 6 Bit21 26 Bit05 6 Bit21 26
Bit06 7 Bit22 27 Bit06 7 Bit22 27
Bit07 8 Bit23 28 Bit07 8 Bit23 28
C 9 C 29 C 9 C 29
Bit08 10 Bit24 30 S 10 S 30
Bit09 11 Bit25 31 Bit08 11 Bit24 31
Bit10 12 Bit26 32 Bit09 12 Bit25 32
Bit11 13 Bit27 33 Bit10 13 Bit26 33
Bit12 14 Bit28 34 Bit11 14 Bit27 34
Bit13 15 Bit29 35 Bit12 15 Bit28 35
Bit14 16 Bit30 36 Bit13 16 Bit29 36
Bit15 17 Bit31 37 Bit14 17 Bit30 37
C 18 C 38 Bit15 18 Bit31 38
N.C. 19 N.C. 39 C 19 C 39
N.C. 20 N.C. 40 S 20 S 40

* In case the 64-point module, the signal No.00 to 31 depends on the table mentioned above. For signal No.32 to 63 (including

COM), read signal No.00 to 31 as signal No.32 to 63 in above table.


When using the 64-point module, 2 sets of the terminal block (HPX7DS-40V6) and the connection cable (EH-CBM**W) per a

module are needed.

10 – 3
Chapter 10 Accessories

10.4 Cable for 32 / 64-Point Module

Name and function of each part EH-CBM01W (1 m (3.28 ft.))


Type (Length)
EH-CBM03W (3 m (9.84 ft.))
(Both edges
connector type) EH-CBM05W (5 m (16.4 ft.))
Connector EH-CBM10W (10 m (32.8 ft.))
Type (Length) EH-CBM01 (1 m (3.28 ft.))
Both edges connector type
(One edge EH-CBM03 (3 m (9.84 ft.))
connector type) EH-CBM05 (5 m (16.4 ft.))
EH-CBM10 (10 m (32.8 ft.))
Diameter AWG# 28

Earth terminal

Discrete wire type


Discrete wire

Item Description
Connector This is a connector for connecting to the 32 / 64-point I/O module.
Discrete wire This is a discrete wire for wiring from the 32 / 64-point I/O module or the terminal unit.
Earth terminal Uses this terminal for class D grounding

Cable code for wiring

Connector Pin No. Color Dot (Color) Connector Pin No. Color Dot (Color)
1 Orange ■(Black) 21 Orange ■■■(Black)
2 Orange □(Red) 22 Orange □□□(Red)
3 Gray ■(Black) 23 Gray ■■■(Black)
4 Gray □(Red) 24 Gray □□□(Red)
5 White ■(Black) 25 White ■■■(Black)
6 White □(Red) 26 White □□□(Red)
7 Yellow ■(Black) 27 Yellow ■■■(Black)
8 Yellow □(Red) 28 Yellow □□□(Red)
9 Pink ■(Black) 29 Pink ■■■(Black)
10 Pink □(Red) 30 Pink □□□(Red)
11 Orange ■■(Black) 31 Orange ■■■■(Black)
12 Orange □□(Red) 32 Orange □□□□(Red)
13 Gray ■■(Black) 33 Gray ■■■■(Black)
14 Gray □□(Red) 34 Gray □□□□(Red)
15 White ■■(Black) 35 White ■■■■(Black)
16 White □□(Red) 36 White □□□□(Red)
17 Yellow ■■(Black) 37 Yellow ■■■■(Black)
18 Yellow □□(Red) 38 Yellow □□□□(Red)
19 Pink ■■(Black) 39 Pink ■■■■(Black)
20 Pink □□(Red) 40 Pink □□□□(Red)

10 – 4
Chapter 10 Accessories

10.5 Cable for Counter Input Module

Name and function of each part EH-CUC01 (1 m (3.28 ft.))

Type (Length) EH-CUC02 (2 m (6.56 ft.))


(One edge EH-CUC03 (3 m (9.84 ft.))
connector type) EH-CUC04 (4 m (13.1 ft.))

EH-CUC05 (5 m (16.4 ft.))


Connector
Diameter AWG# 24
Discrete wire
Wire No.
corresponding to
1 the terminal No. is
2

Item Description
Connector This is a connector for connecting to the counter input module.
Discrete wire This is a discrete wire for wiring from the counter input module.

10 – 5
Chapter 10 Accessories

MEMO

10 – 6
Chapter 11 PAC Installation, Mounting, Wiring
For safety use, avoid installing the PAC in the following locations.

- Excessive dusts, salty air, and / or conductive materials (iron powder, etc.)
- Direct sunlight
- Temperature less than 0 °C or more than 55 °C
- Dew condensation
- Humidity less than 5 % or more than 95 %
- Direct vibration and / or impact to the unit
- Corrosive, explosive and / or combustible gasses
- Water, chemicals and / or oil splashing on the PAC
- Close to noise emission devices

11.1 Installation

(1) Installing location and environment


(a) Use the module in the “3.1 General Specification” environment when installing the HX-CPU.
(b) Mount the PAC onto the metal plate.
(c) Install the PAC in a suitable enclosure such as a cabinet which opens with a key, tool, etc.
(2) Installation of a base unit
(a) Precaution when installing the base unit
1] Fix the base unit securely with screws in 4 places (M4, length 20 mm (0.79 in.)or longer) or DIN rail
when installing it.
2] To keep using the unit within the ambient temperature range.
a) Allow ample space for air circulation. (50 mm (1.97 in.) or more at top and bottom, 10 mm (0.39 in.) or
more at right and left)
b) Avoid installing the unit directly above equipment that generates a lot of heat (heater, transformer,
large-capacity resistance, etc.).
c) Install a fan or a cooler to lower the ambient temperature to below 55 °C when the temperature reaches
more than 55 °C.
3] Avoid mounting inside a panel where high-voltage equipment is installed.
4] Install 200 mm (7.87 in.) or more away from high-voltage wires or power wires.
5] Avoid mounting the unit upside down, in vertical, or in horizontal.

11 – 1
Chapter 11 PAC Installation, Mounting, Wiring

124 (4.88)
L1
14 (0.55)

90 (3.74)

100 (3.94)
10 mm (0.39 in.) 10 mm (0.39 in.)
or more or more

50 mm (1.97 in.)
or more
L2

10 mm (0.39 in.) 10 mm (0.39 in.)


or more or more Figure 11.2 External dimensions
Wiring duct 50 mm (1.97 in.) Table 11.1 Dimensional table
or more
Base L1 L2
(External (Mounted
Figure 11.1 Amount of installation dimensions) dimensions)
EH-BS3A 222.5 (8.76) 207 (8.15)
EH-BS5A 282.5 (11.2) 267 (10.51)
EH-BS6A 312.5(12.31) 297(11.70)
EH-BS8A 372.5 (14.67) 357 (14.06)
EH-BS11A 462.5 (18.21) 447 (17.6)
EH-BS8R 432.5 (17.01) 417 (16.42)
Unit: mm (in.)

(b) Mounting to a DIN rail


Attaching to a DIN rail
1] Hook the claw fixed at the bottom of the base
unit, to the DIN rail.
2] Press the base unit into the DIN rail until it
1] clicks.

* Make sure the base unit is securely fixed after


installation.

2]

Fixing the unit


0 1 2 3
4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3
4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3
4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3
4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3
4 5 6 7
Secure the unit by installing DIN rail fixing
RUN 8 9 10 11 8 9 10 11 8 9 10 11 8 9 10 11 8 9 10 11

HITACHI E.CLR

ERR
12 13 14 15 12 13 14 15 12 13 14 15 12 13 14 15
brackets from both sides. (The product may go out
of place if not secured within the fixing brackets.)

USB-A

USB-B

L/A
L/A
ETH 1
ETH 3
SPEED
SPEED
L/A SPEED

ETH2

Removing the unit from the DIN rail


1] While lowering the DIN rail fixing mounting lever
toward the bottom, raise the base upward to
remove.

2]

1]

11 – 2
Chapter 11 PAC Installation, Mounting, Wiring

11.2 Mounting Module


(1) Installing
2]
1] Hook the claw at the lower section of the module
to the hole in the base.
2] Press in the upper side of the module until it
clicks.

*1 Make sure the module does not come out after


loading the module.
*2 Load the power module at the far left side of
1] base unit.
*3 Load the CPU module and the I/O controller to
the left of the power module.

It can reinforce with the screw after installation.


Use M4×10 mm screws in this case.

(2) Removing
1] 1] Push in the lock button.
3] 2] With the lock button pushed in, pull the top of
the module toward the front.
3] Raise it toward the top and pull it out.

2] * Pull the power module out while pushing down


the two lock buttons.

11 – 3
Chapter 11 PAC Installation, Mounting, Wiring

11.3 Wiring
(1) Separation of the power system
There is power for the HX-CPU unit / power for I/O signal / power for general equipment as the power supply.
These power supplies should be wired from separate systems as much as possible.
When these power supplied are supplied from one main power source, separate the wiring with a transformer or
similar devices, so that each power supply is a separate system.
Main power supply NF
100 V AC
to Power for HX-CPU unit
200 V AC
Transformer
NF: Noise filter
NF
Power for I/O signals

Transformer
NF

Power for general equipment

Figure 11.3 Example of power system diagram

(2) Regarding fail safe


1] Construct an interlock circuit outside the PAC.
When the PAC power supply is turned ON / OFF, the lag time and the difference in the startup time between
the PAC unit power and the external power (particular DC power supply) for the PAC I/O module signals
may temporarily cause the I/O not to operate normally.
Do not control the power for the EH-YR12 relays to have it perform an interlock with the external load, etc.
The relay may turn on even when the power has not been supplied by an aluminum electrolytic condenser
inside the module to drive the relay.
Also, it is conceivable that a fault in the external power and a failure in the PAC unit lead to abnormal
actions. To prevent such actions from causing abnormal operation in the entire system, and from a point of
view of creating a fail safe mechanism, construct ladder such as an emergency stop circuit, the protect
circuit, and the interlock circuit, for the sections that lead to a mechanical breakdown and accident from
abnormal actions outside the PAC.

2] Install a lightning arrester


To prevent damage to equipment as a result of being struck by lightning, we recommend setting up a
lightning arrester for each PAC power supply ladder.

The HX-CPU detects power failures from a voltage drop of the internal 5 V DC power supply. For this reason,
the load in the 5 V DC power of the unit is light, the 5 V DC is retained for a long time and operations may
continue for more than 100 ms. Therefore, when using the AC input module, an OFF delay timer for
coordinating with the internal 5 V DC is needed because the AC input signal turns off more quickly than the
internal.

11 – 4
Chapter 11 PAC Installation, Mounting, Wiring

(3) Wiring to the power module


(a) For power supply wiring, use a cable of 2 mm2
POWER
0 1
4 5
(0.0031 in2.) or more to prevent a voltage drop
RUN 8 9
HITACHI E.CLR
ERR
12 13 from occurring.
(b) The function ground terminal (FE terminal)
should use a cable of 2 mm2 (0.0031 in2) or more
and Class D grounding (100 Ω or less). The
100 V AC appropriate distance for ground cable is within
USB-A
to 200 V AC 20 m (65.62 ft.).
USB-B
1] Shared with instrumentation panel, relay panel
L/A

Leak
ETH 1 grounding.
SPEED
L/A SPEED 2] Avoid joint grounding with equipment that can
ETH2
generate noise such as high-frequency heating
Power supply furnace, large power panel (several kW or
for sensor more), thyristor exchanger, electric welders, etc.
Noise 3] Be sure to connect a noise filter (NF) to the
filter power cable.
Insulation
transformer (c) A terminal screw is an M3. Tighten screws within
with shield a torque range of 0.49 to 0.78 N・ m when
Figure 11.4 Wiring power diagram wiring.
(d) Use the same power supply system for the basic
and expansion units.

(4) Wiring cable for I/O signals


Screw for each terminal is M3.
Tighten within a torque range of 0.49 to 0.78 N・m.
Use a crimp terminal with an outer diameter of
6 mm (0.24 in.) or less when using it.
Use only up to 2 crimp terminals in the same
terminal. Avoid clamping down more than 3 at the
same time.
Use a cable thickness of 0.75 mm2 (0.0011 in2.) at
the maximum. (Use a 0.5 mm2 (0.00075 in2.) cable
when adding 2 crimp terminals in the same
terminal.)
* Use shielded cable for the relay output module
when corresponding to CE marking EMC
command is necessary.

Attaching the terminal block


1] Align the tip of a terminal block mounting screw
to the screw section of the I/O cover insertion
2] fittings.
2] Push in the top of the terminal block until the
I/O cover claw section locks with a click.
4] 3] Tighten terminal block mounting screws while
holding down the upper part of the terminal
block.
4] Pull on the top of the terminal block to make
cure that it is locked and cannot come out.
* Always reinstall it following the instructions
3] above if the terminal block is removed.

1]

11 – 5
Chapter 11 PAC Installation, Mounting, Wiring

(5) Input wiring for the input module


DC input AC input
(EH-XD16、EH-XD8) (EH-XA16、EH-XAH16)

0 0
8 8
1 1
9 9
2 2
10 10
3 3
11 11
4 4
12 12
5 5
13 13
6 6
14 14
7 7
+ 15 15
C C
C C
Current-output-type 24 V DC AC100 V
proximity switch (Example of EH-XA16)
(Example of EH-XD16)

Figure 11.5 Input wiring

(a) DC input module


1] When all input terminal and the common terminal (C) are loaded with 24 V DC, the input changes to ON,
and approximately 6.9 mA current in case of EH-XD8, or approximately 4 mA current in case of
EH-XD16, flow to the external input contacts.
2] For sensors such as a proximity switch and photoelectric switch, current-output-type (transistor open
collector) can be directly connected. For voltage-output-type sensors, connect them to the input terminal
after first going through the transistor.
3] Measures to prevent contact failure in high load current contact.
High load The current that flows to a contact when external contacts
current contact are closed is approximately 6.9 mA for the EH-XD8, and
0 approximately 4 mA for EH-XD16. If it is necessary high
Approx. 50 mA
load current to the contact, add resistance as shown in the
+ 3W diagram at left and supply sufficient current to the contact
24 V DC 560 Ω
to prevent a contact failure .
C

4] Limit the wiring length within 30 m (98.43 ft.).

(b) Wiring for 32 / 64-point input module (EH-XD32, EH-XD64) (Based on CE marking)

EH-XD32 / 64 Shield cable Signal line

0
1
2

31

C Class D grounding
Common +
terminal

+ Common line
External power supply

*1 Wire only the signal line through the shield cable, and provide class D grounding on the shield
cable side.
*2 Do not wire the common line or S terminal line through the shield cable. Be sure to wire them
independently and separately from the power line, I/O lines or power supply line.
*3 The supply line to the external power supply should be wired as close as possible to the common
terminal of the output module.

11 – 6
Chapter 11 PAC Installation, Mounting, Wiring

(c) AC input module


When using the AC input module, if the wiring route gets longer, voltage may be generated on the input
terminal though there are no actual signal, because the leak current may flow by the stray capacity between
wirings..

External device AC input module

There are the following two methods 1] and 2] as its countermeasures. Please limit the voltage caused by the
electrostatic combination on the input terminal, to half the maximum OFF voltage level of the input module.
1] Lower impedance of the input module by connecting the dummy resistance with the input terminal in
parallel.
2] Connect the external power supply to the external device side.
Dummy resistance

External device AC input module

(6) Output wiring for the output module


Item Relay output Relay output Transistor output Transistor output
(EH-YR12) (EH-YR16) (sink type) (source type)
(EH-YT16, EH-YT8) (EH-YTP16、
EH-YTP16S, EH-YTP8)
Diode Diode
Surge killer
24 V DC + + or 0
- 8 0 0
NO Diode 8 8
Surge killer NO
1
9 1 1
or 0 2 9 9
External wiring

Diode 6 10 2 2
1 3 10 10
7 11 3 3
2 4 11 11
8 12 4 4
3 5 12 12
9 13 5 5
4 6 13 13
10 14 6 6
5 7 14 14
FUSE 11 FUSE 15 7 7
C C 12 / 24 V DC FUSE 15 FUSE 12 / 24 V DC 15
C C C C
24 V DC + S + S
24 V DC
100 / 240 V AC 100 / 240 V AC (Example of EH-YT16) (Example of EH-YTP16)

Figure 11.6 Output wiring

11 – 7
Chapter 11 PAC Installation, Mounting, Wiring

(a) Wiring for the relay output module


1] Life of relay contact
Life curve of relay contact
1000 Life of the contact is also in squared
24 V DC L load
500 reverse proportion to the current, so be
24 V DC R load aware that interrupting rush current or
240 V AC R load directly driving the condenser load will

Switching life (10,000 times)


100 drastically reduce the life of the relay.
When switching is done with high
240 V AC L load
frequency, use a transistor output module.
10

1
0.1 0.5 1 2
Shut-off current (A)

2] Surge killer
For inductive load, connect a surge killer (condenser 0.1 µF, + resistance of around 100 Ω) in parallel to
the load. Also, for DC load, connect a flywheel diode.
3] Fuse
A fuse is not built in this module. Install a 6A fuse in the common to prevent the external wiring from
burning out.
4] Power supply for driving the relay
If a 24 V DC power supply is connected to drive the relay, take care with respect to the polarity when
connecting. There is a risk that the internal circuit will be damaged if the wiring is done incorrectly. Also,
do not perform an interlock, etc. to the external load with the power supply for driving the relay.

(b) Wiring for the transistor output module


1] Flywheel diode
For inductive load, connect a flywheel diode in parallel.
2] S and C terminals
Always connect an S terminal and C (common) terminal. If the module is used without connecting these
terminals, the internal flywheel diode does not function and there is a risk that the module will
malfunction or breakdown.
3] Fuse
A fuse is inserted in the common to prevent the external wiring from burning out, but this does not protect
transistor elements. Therefore, note that these elements are destroyed when the external load is
short-circuited. Please contact us for repair if the external load short-circuits.
Also, if the fuse blows, there will be no output even if the LED lights up. (The fuse out lamp for the
module at this time as well as a CPU module error will not be displayed.)
* If the fuse is melted or blown, do not supply power to the module after changing the fuse without
eliminating the source of the problem. Damage escalation, smoke, etc., may otherwise result.

11 – 8
Chapter 11 PAC Installation, Mounting, Wiring

(c) Wiring for the 32 / 64-point output module (EH-YT32 / YTP32, EH-YT64 / YTP64)(Based on CE marking)

EH-YT32, EH-YTP32

S terminal line
S Shield cable Signal line

31

C
Common
terminal Class D
grounding

At using EH-YTP**
Common line

At using EH-YT** External power supply

*1 Wire only the signal line through the shield cable and provide class D grounding on the shield
cable side.
*2 Do not wire the common line or S terminal line through the shield cable. Be sure to wire them
independently and separately from the power line, I/O lines or power supply line.
*3 The supply line to the external power supply should be wired as close as possible to the common
terminal of the output module.

(7) I/O wiring for the analog module


- Do not apply excess voltage to the analog input module beyond the rated input voltage. Similarly, do not
subject the module to current that exceeds the rated input current. Connecting the analog input module to a
power supply other than the specified types may cause damage to the product or burning or its internal
components.
- For unused channels of the analog input module, short the input terminals before use.
- For unused channels of the analog output module (unused current output channel, 2 to 3 channels), short the
outputs before use.
- When wiring the external lines of the analog module, route then through the shield cables while separating
them from other power lines or signal lines subject to differential voltage. Shield cables must be grounded
on one side. However, whether it is more effective to ground on both side and leave both sides open,
depends on the noise environment condition in the actual use. Provide appropriate grounding based on the
noise environment.
- Use separate piping for the AC power supply line and the signal / data lines.
- Wire the signal lines and data lines as close as possible to the grounded surface of the cabinet or a metal bar.

11 – 9
Chapter 11 PAC Installation, Mounting, Wiring

(8) Wiring to the module terminal

AC Power
If the number of expansion unit is 5unit,
please use shielded cable for this line.
Wiring for the power supply

Use a 2 mm2(0.031 in2.) cable and twist it.


Leave a distance of 100 mm(3.94 in.) or more
Shielded insulation
from the signal cable and 200 mm (7.87 in.) or
transformer
more from the power line.

RUN

NF E.CLR
ERR

Always connect a noise


USB-A
filter
USB-B
Expansion cable
L/A

ETH 1
Always segregate power line. I/O signal and
Use the same power supply SPEED power supply cable.
system for basic and expansion L/A SPEED
ETH2
bases.

Ground wiring

Use a cable 2 mm2 (0.0031 in2.) or


more and wire it within a distance of
20 m(65.62 ft.).

I/O signal cable

Use cable 0.75 mm2 (0.0011 in2.) or less.


Leave a distance of 200 mm(7.87 in.) or more
from the power line and do not have it
running next to the power cable.
FE relay terminal block

Wiring for the power supply


Use a cable of about 14 mm2 (0.021 in2.).

Class D grounding

Metal plate Outer hull (cabinet)


Implement class D grounding. Implement class D grounding.

Figure 11.7 Example of wiring

11 – 10
Chapter 12 Maintenance and Inspection
In order to use the HX-CPU functions in the most desirable condition and maintain the system to operate normally, it is
necessary to conduct daily and periodic inspections.

12.1 Daily and Periodic Inspection


(1) Daily inspection
Verify the following items while the system is running.
Table 12.1 Items for daily inspection

Item LED display Inspection Normal status Main cause of error


method
Power module display POW Visual check ON Power supply error, etc.
CPU module display RUN Visual check ON OFF:
(Running) Microprocessor error, memory error, etc.
Refer to chapter 3 for further information.
ERR Visual check OFF ON:
Serious errors such as microprocessor error or
memory error, etc. Refer to chapter 3.
Blink:
7x error
7-segment Visual check 00 Self-diagnosis error code is displayed.
*1 If power off time is more than 7 days, realtime clock data could be lost due to super capacitor.

(2) Periodic inspection


Turn off the power for the external I/O circuit, and check the following items once every six months.
Table 12.2 Items for periodic inspection

Part Item Check criteria Remarks


Programming device Check the operation of the All switch and display lamps work
to CPU programming device properly.
Power supply Check for the voltage fluctuations EH-PSA, EH-PSR: Tester
85 to 264 V AC
EH-PSD:
21.6 to 26.4V DC
I/O module Output relay life Electrical life 200,000 times Refer to the relay contact
Mechanical life 10 million times file curve (chapter 11).
LED Turns ON / OFF correctly
External power voltage Within the specification for each Refer to the
I/O module. specifications of I/O
module
Battery Check voltage and life ERR lamp flashes.
(Lithium battery) Within 5 years after replacement.
Installation and (1) All module are securely fixed. No defects Tighten
connecting areas (2) All command fits snugly. Check insertion
(3) All screw is tight. Tighten
(4) All cables are normal. Visual check
Ambient environment (1) Temperature 0 to 55 °C Visual check
(2) Humidity 5 to 95 % RH (no condensation)
(3) Others No dust, foreign matter, vibration
Spare part Check the number of parts, the No defects Visual check
storage condition
Program Check program contents Compare the contents of the latest Check both master and
program saved and CPU contents, backup.
and make sure they are the same.

12 – 1
Chapter 12 Maintenance and Inspection

12.2 Life of Product


The lifetime of electrolytic capacitors used in the power module is limited. Electrolytic capacitors are used in some of
I/O modules to improve noise resistance. If the lifetime is exceeded, performance of product is not guaranteed. Be sure
to conduct inspection and maintenance as follows.

(1) Power module


Many electrolytic capacitors are used in the power module. It is said that lifetime of electrolytic capacitor
would be half when ambient temperature increases 10 °C.
If lifetime of electrolytic capacitor is exceeded, output power becomes unstable especially when output current
is high due to many point of outputs are activated for example.
Prepare spare units with considering 5 years lifetime in case ambient temperature is 30 °C. For longer lifetime,
take account of installation location in terms of temperature and air circulation around power unit and.
(2) CPU module
Some electrolytic capacitors are used in CPU module also. If lifetime of electrolytic capacitor is exceeded,
more errors could happen since noise resistance is not enough. Be sure to overhaul CPU module periodically.
CPU module has a capacitor to maintain realtime clock data. Backup time with the capacitor is 7 days. The life
of the capacitor is approximately 31,000 hours, the ambient temperature influences the life of the capacitor.
When the capacitor is life, the backup time becomes short. When the time is not synchronous with a NTP
server. In the case of the following, use the battery.
- During the 8 days or more of a power cut, if the retention of realtime clock data is required
- When HX-CPU is used by more than 50 ℃ of environment.

Be noted following points about lifetime of battery.


- Refer to the following tables in the lifetime of the battery.
- When using the battery, enable the battery error detection. Refer to the manual section 2.6 Configuration
of HX series application manual (Software).
- The life time of the battery means the total time of interruption of power supply for PAC.
- When ERR LED is displayed flashing or the 7-segment LED is displayed 71, replace the battery within 7
days.
- The durable life of the battery is 5 years. Even if the battery is not a life, replace it every 5 years.
Battery life (Total power failure time)[Hr]
Guaranteed value (MIN) @55 °C Actual value (MAX) @25 °C
25,000 67,000

12 – 2
Chapter 13 Troubleshooting
13.1 Error Code
HX-CPU has 7-segment display and error LED to indicate an error code as listed below. If two or more errors are
detected at the same time, smaller error code has higher priority to be displayed. If error is detected, read the
description following countermeasures depending on error level.

Error clear switch

RUN LED (Green)

ERR LED (Red)

7-segment LED

Error code Error level Countermeasure


88, 11 to 1F Serious error Cycle power. If it does not solve, contact your local supplier.
20 to 34 Exception Exception status is cleared only by Reset operation.
Execute Reset cold / warm / origin by HX-CODESYS
70 to 79 Warning User program execution does not stop by warning. If you need to activate alarm or
any action by warning, use CmpHIESErrors_HX library.
Press E.CLR button to clear error code.

Err. Error name Description PAC Applica- ERR


code [Detected when] System* tion LED
88 Hardware watchdog The watchdog timer detected a microcomputer Stop Stop
error [Always] overload error because the microcomputer did
not operate according to the system program.
11 System ROM error (OS) Checksum value of system program (OS) in Stop Stop
[Power on] FLASH does not match the checksum
calculated.
12 Read / Write check failed Read / write check for system RAM has failed. Stop Stop
in RAM
[Power on]
17 System ROM error Checksum value of system program Stop Stop
(File system) (File system) in FLASH does not match the
[Power on] checksum calculated.
18 MAC address error MAC address is missing or wrong value. Stop Stop
[Power on]

1A Initialize failed in power Initialization of power supply has failed. Stop Stop
management device
[Power on]
1F Flash access failed Access to a FLASH memory has failed. Stop Stop
[Power on]

:ON, :Blink, :OFF

* When a PAC system stops, because a system program of PAC stops, you can't communicate with HX-CODESYS.

13 – 1
Chapter 13 Troubleshooting

Err. Error name Description PAC Applica- ERR


code [Detected when] System tion LED
20 Illegal instruction Illegal instruction was detected in a processor. Run Stop
[Always]

21 Retain identify mismatch Error of checksum value for retain memory data Run Stop
[Power on] was detected.

23 Unresolved external A library doesn't exist in CPU. Run Stop


references
[Always]
24 Software watchdog error Actual cycle time has exceeded watchdog time. Run Stop
[Always] Set longer watchdog time.
A task doesn’t react within certain time.
25 Processor load watchdog The processor load reached to the specific Run Stop
[Always] percentage. The detect condition varies with the
CPU firmware version.
3.5.8.xx: 80 %
3.5.13.xx: 100 %
27 Division by zero The divisor of division command is 0 in IEC Run Stop
[Always] program.

28 FPU* Division by zero The divisor of division command is 0 in IEC Run Stop
[Always] program (FPU).

29 Access violation Access violation was detected in a processor. Run Stop


[Always]

2A Overflow Overflow was detected in a processor. Run Stop


[Always]

2B FPU* Overflow FPU overflow was detected in a processor. Run Stop


[Always]

2C FPU* Underflow FPU underflow was detected in a processor. Run Stop


[Always]

2E FPU* Invalid operation FPU Invalid operation was detected in a Run Stop
[Always] processor.

31 Load boot project failed Checksum value of user program in FLASH Run Stop
[Power on] does not match the checksum calculated.

32 Io Configuration Error The setting of Modbus specification outside Run Stop


[Always] value was detected.

34 Configuration file Error Configuration file Error was detected in a Run Stop
[Power on] processor.

59 Access violation Access violation caused by communication etc. Run Stop


[Always] was detected in a processor.

* FPU means a Floating Point Unit of main processor in the HX-CPU.

:ON, :Blink, :OFF

13 – 2
Chapter 13 Troubleshooting

Err. Error name Description PAC Applica- ERR


code [Detected when] System tion LED
70 I/O Configuration Error I/O configuration does not match with actual Run Run
[Always] I/O modules.

71 Battery error Battery voltage is low or battery is Run Run


[Always] disconnected.

72 Special module failure Hardware error is detected in special module or Run Run
[Always] communication module.

74 Comm. module Configuration error is detected in Run Run


configuration error communication module.
[Always]
77 FLASH writing failure Failure has been detected in writing FLASH Run Run
[FLASH writing] memory or the number of writing times
(100,000 times) has been exceeded.
78 Checksum mismatch in Checksum value of IP address in FLASH does Run Run
Flash (IP address) not match the checksum calculated.
[Power on]
79 Real-time clock Real-time clock was initialized, because power Run Run
initialized cut time exceeds the 7 days of the guarantee
[Power on] time.

:ON, :Blink, :OFF

* If error cause is removed, error code remains except for error code 71 (battery error).
71 Error and ERR LED blinking automatically disappear if battery is replaced to new one.
It's possible to invalidate I/O configuration Error detection and battery error detection in PAC Parameters setting.
For details, please refer to an application manual [Software].

13 – 3
Chapter 13 Troubleshooting

13.2 Corrective Actions when Error Occurs

The process flow when error occurs is shown below.

Error occurrence

CPU module detects error, and its error is indicated in lighting/flashing/unlit


of RUN, ERR, and 7-segment LEDs.

Verify the self-diagnosis error code using the 7-segment LED or the
programming tool.

Remove the error factor according to the corrective actions for each error code
as shown below.

If there are spare parts available, replace the parts. Contact your local
supplier.

Error Error name Corrective action


code
88 Hardware watchdog error Recheck the fixation of the HX-CPU to the basic base unit, and restart the power supply.
11 System ROM error (OS) If the same error occurs, it is a hardware error in the HX-CPU. Replace the CPU module with a spare.
12 Read / Write check failed in Make sure that there are no machines which generates excessive noise, etc. near HX-CPU system.
RAM
17 System ROM error
(File system)
18 MAC address error
1A Initialize failed in power
management device
1F Flash access failed
20 Illegal instruction Check the user program.
21 Retain identify mismatch Login to HX-CPU and reset cold.
23 Unresolved external Check the library.
references When a making library is being used, check that "External implementation" in property of Application
becomes disable.
24 Software watchdog error Change the software watchdog time of the user program.
Change to the program that Processor load may be done small. For example make the task cycle long.
25 Processor load watchdog Change to the program that Processor load may be done small. For example make the task cycle long.
27 Division by zero Change to the program that does not execute the division by zero.
28 FPU Division by zero Check the user program.
29 Access violation
2A Overflow
2B FPU Overflow
2C FPU Underflow
2E FPU Invalid operation
31 Load boot project failed The contents of the user program are destroyed. Transfer the program again after initialization.
32 Io Configuration Error Set the correct settings.
34 Configuration file Error Transfer the program again and reset an error. When using supporting function for security protection,
reconfiguration supporting function for security protection settings.
59 Access violation Check the communication environment.

13 – 4
Chapter 13 Troubleshooting

Error Error name Corrective action


code
70 I/O Configuration Error Check the I/O assignment once more.
Recheck the fixation of each I/O module and I/O controller, and the connection of the expansion cable.
71 Battery error Replace the battery with a new one.
Check the connection of the battery connector.
When operating in the battery-less, set to disable the “Battery error detection”.
72 Special module failure Refer to the error code of the special module, perform the error recovery processing.
74 Comm. module configuration Refer to the error code of the comm. module, perform the error recovery processing.
error
77 FLASH writing failure After the initialization, download the user program again.
If the same error occurs, it is a hardware error in the CPU module. Replace the CPU module with a
spare.
78 Checksum mismatch in Flash Set the IP address (ETH1, 2, 3) again.
(IP address)
79 Real-time clock initialized Set the time in the Real-time clock. Refer to ”SetDateAndTime” an application manual
[Command references].

Resetting the factory default settings

When that does not solve the problem even after you restart and when the online connection to the HX-CODESYS has
become impossible, it's possible to reset HX-CPU to factory default settings.

< How to reset the factory default settings >


(1) Remove power from the PAC.
(2) Toggle the RUN / STOP switch to STOP position.
(3) Turn on all 2 bits switches (SW1).
(4) Supply power to the PAC with E.CLR button pressed until “SP” is displayed in the 7-segment LED.

(5) Toggle the RUN / STOP switch to RUN position.


(6) It takes a few seconds to delete boot project. Then “Fn” is displayed in the 7-segment LED.

(7) Turn off all 2 bits switches (SW1).


When turning on the power next time, it starts with the factory default settings.

Error clear switch

RUN / STOP switch


2-bit switch

7-segment LED

13 – 5
Chapter 13 Troubleshooting

13.3 Error Libraries

As for warnings (error code 70 to 79), special libraries called “CmpHIESErrors_HX” are available as below. Use them
in your application program if necessary. If it is not registered in your library repository, install
CmpHIESErrors_HX.compiled-library by choosing [Tools]-[Install library...].

Error Libraries (CmpHIESErrors_HX) Input Output


code
all - Last detected error code
(WORD)

All Execution bit to Result (BOOL)


clear error code
(BOOL)
70 - 70 Error bit (BOOL)
Unit number (WORD)

(FB) Slot number (WORD)


71 - 71 Error bit (BOOL)

72 - 72 Error bit (BOOL)


Unit number (WORD)
(FB) Slot number (WORD)
74 - 74 Error bit (BOOL)
Unit number (WORD)
(FB) Slot number (WORD)
77 - 77 Error bit (BOOL)

78 - 78 Error bit (BOOL)

79 - 79 Error bit (BOOL)

13 – 6

You might also like